Samsung Electronics
A N D R O I D
U s e r
T A B L E T
M a n u a l
Please read this manual before operating your
device and keep it for future reference.
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to
the SAMSUNG Galaxy Tab, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Galaxy Tab System”), is
proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but
is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related
documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property.
Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is
transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
Headquarters:
Customer Care Center:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
1000 Klein Rd.
Richardson, TX 75082
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel:
1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address: http://www.samsung.com
©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC.
Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:
http://www.samsung.com/us/support
T859_English_UM_UVKJ2_PS_102611_F3
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, XT9® Smart Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance
Communications, Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered
trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube
are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified®
device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain your registration code, from the Home screen, tap Apps > Settings > About device > Legal Information >
License settings > DivX® VOD > Register. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open
source licenses, please visit: http://opensource.samsung.com.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT “AS IS”, AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE
WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE
PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR
YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started .............................................. 5
Understanding This User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Turning Your Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting Up Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Retrieving Your Google Account Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using Google Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Galaxy Tab Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Securing Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Section 2: Understanding Your Device ........................ 13
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and Side Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top and Bottom Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
14
15
15
16
18
21
22
22
23
26
Mini App Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apps Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
App Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wallpapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
28
28
34
38
39
39
Section 3: Entering Text ............................................... 41
Virtual QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using XT9 Predictive Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Speech Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
42
43
46
49
51
52
Section 4: Contacts and Accounts .............................. 53
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
53
58
61
63
64
1
Section 5: Messaging ................................................... 65
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Viewing Newly Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Section 6: Multimedia .................................................. 83
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
T-Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Music App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Section 7: Connections .............................................. 110
Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Enable Downloading for Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Connecting to Kies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2
Tethering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Managing Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Section 8: Applications and Widgets ....................... 127
GPS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Asphalt 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Blio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Dropbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
eBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Get Web Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Google Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Market . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MobileLife Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pen Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pro Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qello . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quickoffice HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SimCity Deluxe HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Social Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T-Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TegraZone Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
147
147
149
149
149
150
151
153
154
154
155
155
156
156
158
158
158
159
159
160
160
160
161
162
162
162
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yahoo Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zinio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
163
165
166
Section 9: Settings ..................................................... 167
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tethering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accounts and Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language and Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
167
169
174
176
178
179
182
185
189
189
191
191
195
196
196
Section 10: Health and Safety Information ............... 199
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . . .
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
203
205
205
207
3
Section 11: Warranty Information ............................. 214
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Index ............................................................................ 223
4
Section 1: Getting Started
This section helps you to quickly start using your device.
Understanding This User Manual
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your
device. A robust index for features begins on page 223.
Also included is important safety information, beginning on
page 199, that you should know before using your device.
This manual gives navigation instructions according to the
default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation
steps may be different.
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual
assume that you are starting from a Home screen. To get to a
Home screen, you may need to unlock the device. For more
information, refer to “Securing Your Device” on page 12.
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings and may vary
from your device depending on the software version on your device
and any changes to the device’s settings.
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual start with the
device unlocked, at the Home screen.
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may
vary depending on the software version of your device and any
changes to the device’s settings.
Special Text
In this manual, some text is set apart from the rest. This special
text is intended to point out important information, share quick
methods for activating features, define terms, and more. The
definitions for these methods are as follows:
• Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or
sub-menu.
• Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts.
• Important: Points out important information about the current feature
that could affect performance.
• Warning: Brings important information to your attention that can help
to prevent loss of data or functionality or damage to your device.
Text Conventions
This manual provides condensed information about how to use
your device. To make this possible, the following text conventions
are used to represent often-used steps:
➔ Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting
successive options in longer, or repetitive, procedures. For
example:
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings).
Getting Started
5
SIM Card
Your device uses a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module). The 4G LTE
SIM is a small, rectangular plastic card that stores your device
number, information about your wireless service, and other
information such as messages and contacts.
Incorrect
Caution!: Do not bend or scratch the SIM card. Take care when handling,
installing, or removing the SIM card, and avoid exposing the SIM
card to static electricity, water, or dirt. Keep the SIM card out of
reach of small children.
Installing the SIM Card
The SIM card must remain in the device when in use.
Important!: Turn the device off before installing or removing the SIM card. To
turn the device off, press and hold the Power/Lock Key.
1.
Open the SIM card slot and carefully insert the SIM Card
into the slot, with the logo facing up.
2.
Push the SIM card in gently until it clicks into place.
Warning!: Do not insert a microSD or other memory card into the SIM card
slot.
6
Removing the SIM Card
Important!: Turn the device off before installing or removing the SIM card. To
turn the device off, press and hold the Power/Lock Key.
1.
Open the SIM card slot and gently push the SIM Card
inward to release it.
2.
Carefully slide the SIM Card out of the slot.
3.
Place the cover back over the open slot.
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully charge the battery
before using your device for the first time.
After the first charge, you can use the device while charging.
Warning!: Use only approved charging devices. Approved accessories are
designed to maximize battery life. Using other accessories may
invalidate your warranty and may cause damage.
Battery Indicator
The Battery icon in the Status Bar shows the battery power
level. When battery power is 15% or less, your device prompts
you to charge the battery. If you continue to operate the device
without charging, the device powers off. For battery use
information, see “About Device” on page 196.
Tip: Touch the Time field to display battery charge status.
Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable, standard Li-Ion
battery. A Wall/USB Charger (Charging Head and USB cable) are
included with the device for charging the battery.
Charging the Battery
Your device comes with a Wall/USB Charger (Outlet Connector,
Charging Head, and USB cable) to charge your device from any
standard AC power outlet.
Getting Started
7
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully charge the battery
before using your device for the first time.
3.
Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory
Port (3).
After the first charge, you can use the device while charging.
1.
Carefully slide the Outlet Connector into the Charging Head
Correct
(1). Verify the connection is secure.
Incorrect
Outlet Connector
Correct
Charger/Accessory
Port
4.
Incorrect
Charging Head
USB Cable
Plug the Charging Head into a standard AC power outlet.
Warning!: While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not function
due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter
from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device.
5.
When charging is complete, unplug the Charging Head
from the power outlet and remove the USB cable from the
2.
8
Insert the USB cable into the Charging Head (2).
device.
Turning Your Device On and Off
Turning Your Device On
䊳
Press and hold the Power/Lock Key
.
For more information, refer to “Unlocking the Device” on
page 12.
Volume Keys
Note: Your device’s internal antenna is located along the top back of the
device. Do not block the antenna; doing so may affect signal quality
and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than is
necessary. For more information, refer to “GPS Applications” on
page 127.
Turning Your Device Off
1.
Press and hold the Power/Lock Key
2.
At the prompt, tap Power off.
.
Setting Up Your Device
When you first turn on your device, you are asked to set up a few
things.
1.
SIM Card Slot
At the Welcome screen, tap the language field, scroll
through the list and select the language you want your
device to use, such as, English (United States).
2.
Tap Start once you have made your language selection.
3.
Read the Use Google’s location service screen information
and enable either or both of the Google location services.
Tap Next to continue.
Headphone Jack
Getting Started
9
4.
If prompted with the Set date and time screen, tap
6.
Read the Backup and restore screen information and
7.
Tap Done. The main Home screen displays.
GMT+00:00, scroll through the list, and tap the time zone
for your location. If necessary, repeatedly tap above or
below the Date (month, day, year) and Time (hour, minute,
and AM/PM) fields to set the correct date and time. Tap
Next to continue.
5.
Your new device uses your Google account to fully utilize
its Android features, including Gmail, Maps, Navigation,
enable either or both options.
Retrieving Your Google Account Password
A Google account password is required for Google applications. If
you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow
these instructions to retrieve it:
1.
The Sign in with your Google Account screen, allows you to
create a new Google account or sign in, if you already have
a Google account.
• Tap Next ➔ Create account or enter the email address and
password of your existing account then tap Sign in.
– or –
• Tap Skip to perform this task later. For more information, refer to
“Setting Up Your Gmail Account” on page 71.
Note: If you try to sign in to your Google account and you skipped Wi-Fi
setup, the Google Account sign-in failure screen displays.
Tap Connect to Wi-Fi, if you want to set up your Wi-Fi connection to
complete your Google account sign in.
10
From your computer, use an Internet browser to navigate
to http://google.com/accounts.
Google Talk, and the Android Market.
2.
Once the URL loads, click on the Can’t access your
account? link and follow the on-screen instructions.
Using Google Maps
1.
You must also enable location services to use Google Maps.
Some features require Standalone or Google location services.
For more information, refer to “Location and Security” on
page 179.
Use Task Manager to see which applications are running on your
device and to end running applications to extend battery life. You
can also uninstall applications from your device and see how
much memory is used by applications.
Task Manager provides information about Active applications and
includes a RAM manager.
Note: There are some functions that are accessible from almost any screen.
This Mini App Tray can be accessed by tapping the arrow at the bottom
of the screen
.
(Mini App Tray) ➔
– or –
Add the Program monitor widget to a Home screen and
then touch the Program monitor widget. For more
information, refer to “Widgets” on page 34.
2.
Tap the Active applications tab to view applications
3.
Tap the RAM manager tab to display the amount of Random
Task Manager
Your device can run applications simultaneously and some
applications run in the background.
From a Home screen, tap
(Task manager).
In order to use some applications related to Google Maps, you
must first connect Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi
settings” on page 168.
currently running on your device.
Access Memory (RAM) currently in use.
4.
Tap Clear memory to clear inactive and background
processes.
5.
Touch the X in the top right corner of the Task Manager
pop-up to close the application.
Shutting Down a Currently Active Application
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Mini App Tray) ➔
(Task manager).
2.
From the Active applications tab, tap
to end an
application or End all to stop all running applications.
Getting Started
11
Galaxy Tab Accessories
2.
1.
Touch and drag
(Unlock) to the edge of the circle that
appears, as shown.
To find accessories for your Galaxy Tab:
Go to http://www.samsung.com/us/mobile/galaxy-tabaccessories.
2.
Use your model number to find compatible accessories.
Securing Your Device
By default, the device locks automatically when the screen times
out or you can lock it manually. You can unlock the device using
one of the default Unlock screens or, for increased security, use a
personal screen unlock pattern.
For more information about creating and enabling a Screen
unlock pattern, see “Configure Lock Screen” on page 179.
For other settings related to securing your device, see “Location
and Security” on page 179.
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the
device unlocked, at the Home screen.
Press the Power/Lock Key
.
Unlocking the Device
1.
12
Press the Power/Lock Key
Note: You can choose the type of Screen Unlock you want to use, from
Pattern, PIN or Password. For more information, refer to “Location and
Security” on page 179.
Troubleshooting
Locking the device manually
䊳
The last screen you accessed is displayed.
.
If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may
need to reboot the device to regain functionality.
• If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the
(Power/Lock Key) for at least 20 seconds.
Section 2: Understanding Your Device
This section outlines key features of your device and describes
the screen and the icons that appear when the device is in use. It
also shows how to navigate through the device.
Features
– Google TalkTM (Instant Messaging and Video Chat)
• Photo Gallery that supports JPEG, PNG, GIF, WBMP, BMP, and AGIF
formats
• AndroidTM 3.2, Honeycomb
• HD Video Player (1080p)
– Container types: MP4, 3GP, AVI (DivX), WMV (ASF), and FLV
– Codecs: 3GPP, H.263, H.264, WMV, Streaming, and MPEG4 formats
• Android MarketTM for access to over 250,000 Apps
• DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including premium
• 10.1-inch WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD touch screen
• Full HTML Web Browser
• Compatible with Adobe® Flash® technology
• Bluetooth® 2.1 Wireless technology. For more information, refer to
“Bluetooth Settings” on page 169.
• Built-in Wi-Fi technology (802.11 a/b/g/n)
• High Speed packet Access Plus (HSPA+) delivering data speeds faster
than the current 3G network technology
• 3 Megapixel Camera/Camcorder with flash
• 2 Megapixel forward-facing Camera for Video Chat
• Full integration of Google applications (Gmail, YouTube, and Google
Maps)
• Messaging Features:
– Gmail
– Email (corporate and personal)
content
• Music Player supports MP3, ACC, ACC+, eACC+, WMA, MPEG4, WAV,
and MIDI formats
• Ringtone supports MP3, HiFi (mp3, aac), Megatones (MIDI), AAC,
AAC+, eAAC+, MIDI, WMA, MPEG4 formats
• 1GB RAM system memory
• 16GB buit-in memory (on-board)
• Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Blio®, Google BooksTM, and
ZinioTM
• QuickOffice® for easy document viewing and editing
• Social HubTM
• Slacker® Radio
• T-Mobile® TV
Understanding Your Device
13
Warning!: This device does not support some USB storage media devices.
For more information, refer to “Galaxy Tab Accessories” on
page 12.
1
Front and Side Views
The following items can be found on the front and sides of your
device as illustrated.
1.
External Speakers: Used in music or video playback,
notification tones, and for other sounds.
2.
Light Sensor: Used to control screen brightness
automatically and when taking photos with the
Front-facing Camera.
3.
4.
Front-facing Camera Lens: Used when taking photos.
Display Screen: The orientation of the display screen
rotates with the tablet as you turn it. You can turn this
feature on and off. For more information, refer to
“Auto-Rotate Screen” on page 177.
14
4
2
3
1
Top and Bottom Views
1.
Back View
Power/Lock Key: Press and hold to turn the device on or
1.
off. Press to lock the device or to wake the screen for
unlocking. Press and hold to reveal the Tablet options list.
2.
Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or recording
videos.
2.
Camera Flash: Used when taking photos.
Volume Key: From a
Home screen, press to
1
adjust Master Volume.
2
1
During music playback,
2
press to adjust volume.
3.
4.
Charger/Accessory Port:
Plug in a USB cable for
3
charging or to sync
4
music and files.
5
Microphone: Used to
6
pick up your voice or
audio during recording.
5.
Headset Jack: Plug in for
3.5 mm headphones.
6.
SIM Card slot: Insertion slot for SIM card.
Understanding Your Device
15
Home Screen
7.
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual start with the
device unlocked, at the Home screen.
1.
Customize or Menu: Display options for the current screen.
• From a Home screen, you can add Widgets and App shortcuts, and
(Customize).
change the Home screen wallpaper by tapping
The Home screen is the starting point for using your device.
• From within an application screen (ex: Maps), tap
(Menu) to
display options for the current screen. For more information, see
“Widgets” on page 34, “App Shortcuts” on page 38, and
“Wallpapers” on page 39.
Google and Voice Search: Search your tablet and the Web by
typing or speaking. For more information, refer to “Google
Search” on page 140.
2.
1
Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common applications.These
3
2
4
5
6
7
15 16
17
shortcuts are found on the Home screen by default. For
more information, refer to “App Shortcuts” on page 38.
3.
Home screen: The starting point for using your device.
Place shortcuts, widgets and other items to customize your
device to your needs.
4.
Screen Indicator: Displays the current screen location.
5.
Widgets: Applications that run on the Home screen. These
widgets are found on the Home screen by default. For
more information, refer to “Widgets” on page 34.
6.
Apps
: Display the Apps screen.
8
16
9
10 11
12
13
14
Tip: The area across the top of the screen is called the Application Bar.
Note: The buttons along the bottom left of the screen are called Command
Buttons. They include Back, Home, Navigation, Screen Capture, and
Mini App Tray.
14. System Bar: The area along the bottom of the Home screen
where you can find navigation buttons and icons that show
notifications, battery power, and connection details.
15. Notification Icons: Presents icons to show notifications
from the system or from an application. Tap a Notification
8.
Back
: Return to the previous screen or option.
9.
Home
: Display the central Home screen. Touch and
hold to reveal the Task manager.
10. Navigation
: Opens a thumbnail list of applications you
have recently used. Tap a listed item to open it.
11. Screen Capture
: Captures a picture of the current screen
Icon to display more detail. For a list of icons, see “Status
Bar” on page 23.
16. Time: The current time. For more information, refer to
“Date and Time” on page 196.
17. Status Icons: Indicate the status of your tablet. Tap the
Time / Status Icons area to display the Status Details
and saves it in the /Root/ScreenCapture folder. For more
panel. For more information, refer to “Status Bar” on
information, refer to “Files” on page 137.
page 23.
12. Primary Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common features. For
more information, refer to “Primary Shortcuts” on
page 26.
13. Mini App Tray
: Displays those applications that you
can access and use anytime, such as Task manager, your
Note: Network status icons turn blue if you have a Google Account added to
your tablet and the tablet is connected to Google services for syncing
your Gmail, Calendar events, contacts, backing up your settings, and
so on.
If you do not have a Google Account or if, for example, you are
connected to a Wi-Fi network that is not connected to the Internet, the
network icons are gray.
Calendar, a Memo pad, and a Calculator. For more
information, refer to “Mini App Tray” on page 27.
Understanding Your Device
17
Extended Home Screen
3.
The Home screen consists of the Home panel, plus four panels
that extend beyond the display width to provide more space for
adding shortcuts and widgets.
1.
Touch and hold an area of the current screen. The Add to
Home screen options screen displays (shown above).
2.
Slide your finger horizontally across the screen to scroll to
Select one of these options:
• Widgets: For more information, refer to “Widgets” on page 34.
• App shortcuts: For more information, refer to “App Shortcuts”
on page 38.
• Wallpapers: For more information, refer to “Wallpapers” on
page 39.
• More: For more information, refer to “More” on page 39.
Screen Settings
You can customize display screen settings to your preferences.
For more information, refer to “Screen Settings” on page 176.
Navigating Your Device
Use command buttons and the touch screen to navigate.
Using Command Buttons
the left or right side panels.
Back
Note: The center panel (Home screen) displays when you tap
Home.
䊳
Customizing a Screen
1.
Navigate to the desired Home screen, then:
2.
Tap
Tap
(Back) to return to the previous screen, option, or
step.
Note: When the on-screen keyboard is active,
– or –
Touch and hold on the screen. The Add to Home screen
options screen displays.
18
Close Keyboard displays.
(Customize).
Home
䊳
Tap
(Home) to display the first center Home screen.
Other Buttons
Navigation
䊳
Tap
(Navigation) to open a thumbnail list of recently
used applications. Tap an application from the list to open
it.
Screen Capture
䊳
Tap
(Screen Capture) to take a snapshot of the screen
Google Search
Displays the Google Search box that can be used to search for
either a key term both on the device and online. In some
instances, this key opens a search box specific only to the
current application.
1.
currently displayed.
From a Home screen, tap
(Google) to launch the Google Search box.
– or –
To view the screen shots:
1.
Tap
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Files) ➔
(Apps) ➔
(Google
Search).
ScreenCapture.
2.
Tap a screen capture image file to display it.
Note: This folder does not appear until you have taken your first screen
capture.
Tap
Enter a search term and tap a match from the list of
suggestions, device search results, or previously chosen
search matches. Once touched, the item opens in the
appropriate application.
– or –
Mini App Tray
䊳
2.
(Mini App Tray) to display those applications that
From the on-screen keyboard, tapping Voice Search
can be accessed from almost any screen. Tap an
(
application to open it.
enter a search term.
) lets you speak into your device's microphone to
– or –
Tap
to close the anytime list of applications.
Understanding Your Device
19
Configuring Google Search Settings
1.
Launch Google Search.
2.
Tap
2.
Tap the Zoom Control to adjust the view.
(Menu) ➔ Search settings to access the Google
Search settings screen.
3.
Enable searchable by placing a check mark alongside
those desired items.
Context-Sensitive Menus
Context-sensitive menus offer options for features or screens. To
access context-sensitive menus:
1.
Tap
2.
Select an option in the list.
(Menu) to display a list of options.
Compatability
Zoom
Overview
Compatibility Zoom
When an application was designed for a smaller screen, a zoom
control appears next to the on-screen clock. An example of such
an application would be My Device.
1.
Tap OK to adjust the view of the application to fit the
screen.
20
Zooom
Control
Screen Navigation
Tap
Tap items to select or launch them. For example:
• Tap the on-screen keyboard to enter characters or text.
• Tap a menu item to select it.
• Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
Touch and Hold
Notifications
Notification icons appear in the System Bar, to the left of the Time
when you receive a notification. Notifications indicate the arrival
of Gmail, Email, alarms, calendar events, and so on.
Tap a Notification icon for more detail. For example, tap the
available Wi-Fi network icon to see available wireless
connections.
Activate on-screen items. For example:
• Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
• Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Swipe, Flick, or Slide
Swipe, flick, or slide your finger vertically or horizontally across
the screen. For example:
• Unlocking the screen
• Scrolling the Home screens or a menu
Pinch
Use two fingers, such as your index finger and
thumb, to make an inward pinch motion on the
screen, as if you are picking something up, or
an outward motion by sweeping your fingers
out. For example:
• Pinch a photo in Gallery to zoom in.
• Pinch a webpage to zoom in or out.
Notification icons
Time
Tap the Time field to open the Notifications list to view all of your
current notifications. Tap a Notification in the list to display the
item. For example, tap a Gmail entry to open the Gmail
application and view the message.
Most apps that send notifications, such as Gmail and Google
Talk, have their own settings, which you can use to configure
whether and how they send notifications, whether they sound a
ringtone, and so on. See the documentation for those apps for
details.
Understanding Your Device
21
Status Details
This area of the Status Bar displays the current date and time,
battery status, and Wi-Fi connectivity status information.
To open the Status Details:
1.
Tap the Time area of the Status Bar. If you have any current
notifications, their summaries are listed below the Status
Quick Settings
This area allows you to view and control the most common
settings for your tablet, and access the complete Settings
application.
1.
Tap the Time area of the System bar to display the Quick
Settings pop-up.
Details. Tap a notification summary to respond to it.
2.
Close the Status Details by tapping any other part of the
screen.
Status Details
Quick Settings
Alerts or other
Messages
22
Note: IT might be necessary to scroll across the Quick Setting icons to view
all options (ex: Bluetooth).
• Settings: Tap to open the Settings application. For more
information, refer to “Settings” on page 167.
2. Tap a notification entry to display the details or tap X next
The Quick Settings are:
• Wi-Fi: Tap to enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to
“Wi-Fi settings” on page 168.
• Notifications: Tap to enable or disable system and application
notifications. For more information, refer to “Notifications” on
page 21.
• GPS: Tap to enable or disable the device’s GPS functions. For more
information, refer to “Location and Security” on page 179.
• Sound / Vibration: Tap to enable or disable sound mode. When
sound is disabled, Vibration is enabled.
• Auto rotation: Tap to enable or disable automatic rotation. When
disabled, the screen does not rotate when you turn the tablet. For
more information, refer to “Auto-Rotate Screen” on page 177.
• Bluetooth: Tap to enable or disable Bluetooth functionality.
• Flight mode: Tap to enable or disable flight mode. Flight mode
disables all wireless or cellular communication on the device while
still providing functionality of all built-in applications.
• (Brightness slider): Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness
or tap AUTO to allow the device to set brightness automatically
based on available light and battery charge status. For more
information, refer to “Brightness” on page 176.
to a notification of remove it.
3.
Close the Quick Settings by either tapping X in the upper
right corner of the Quick Settings pop-up or any other part
of the screen.
Status Bar
The Status Bar displays icons to show network status, battery
power, and other details.
Battery Level: Shown fully charged.
Charging Indicator: Battery is charging.
Device Power Critical: Battery has only three percent
power remaining. At about 15 percent power
remaining, a popup is displayed to remind you to
charge your device immediately.
Understanding Your Device
23
USB Charging Indicator: The device is connected to a
computer using a USB cable, but it is not charging.
The battery is only charged while connected to a
computer, if the device is turned off. When the device
is off, press the Power/Lock key to see the battery
charging indicator.
USB Connected: Device is connected to a computer
using a USB cable. Displayed in upper left corner of
screen.
USB Tethering Mode: Displays when the USB Tethering
feature is active and communicating.
USB Debugging: Device is connected to a computer in
debugging mode. For more information, refer to “USB
Debugging” on page 184.
Updates Available: Updates to the applications you
have downloaded are available.
Download in progress: An application is being
downloaded to the device.
Download Successful: A recent application download or
update completed successfully.
24
Flight Mode: Indicates that the Flight Mode is active,
which allows you to use many of your device’s features,
but it cannot access online information or applications.
New Text Message: You have new text message. Tap the
icon for additional information.
New Email Message: You have new email. Tap the icon
for additional information.
New Gmail Message: You have new Gmail. Tap the icon
for additional information.
Google Talk Invitation: Someone has invited you to chat
using Google Talk.
Configure input methods: When the keyboard is being
displayed, tap this icon to display a menu of quick
keyboard settings.
Bluetooth Active: Bluetooth is turned on. For more
information, refer to “Bluetooth” on page 115.
Music App: A song is playing in the Music app. Tap
either the Music icon or the Status Details to see the
song title and music player controls. For more
information, refer to “Music App” on page 100.
Music Player: A song is playing. Tap either the Music
icon or the Status Details to see the song title and
music player controls. For more information, refer to
“Music Player” on page 105.
Mobile AP Hotspot: Displays when the Mobile AP
Hotspot feature is active and communicating. For more
information, refer to “Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot” on
page 124.
3G Active: Displays when connected to the 3G network.
GPS Active: Displays when GPS is active.
3G Communicating: Displays when your device is
communicating with the 3G network.
Navigation Active: The Navigation App is active. For
more information, refer to “Navigation” on page 151.
4G Active: Displays when connected to the HSPA+
network.
Alarm Set: Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a
specified time. For more information, refer to “Alarm”
on page 128.
4G Communicating: Displays when your device is
communicating with the HSPA+ network.
Wi-Fi Active: Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Power Saving Mode: Indicates that your device is
automatically making adjustments to conserve battery
power. For more information, refer to “Power Saving
Mode” on page 178.
Wi-Fi Action Needed: Action needed to connect to
Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Wi-Fi In Range: An open Wi-Fi network is in range.
Understanding Your Device
25
Primary Shortcuts
Primary Shortcuts appear at the bottom of the main Home
screen.
Gallery: View and manage photos stored on your
device. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on
page 94.
Email: Provides access to both your Outlook
(Exchange Server-based) work email and Internet
email accounts. For more information, refer to
“Email” on page 73.
Media Hub: Provides you with a one stop shop for the
hottest movie and TV content. For more information,
refer to “Media Hub” on page 98.
Browser: Access the Internet. For more information,
refer to “Browser” on page 110.
Market: Browse, download, and install Android
applications. For more information, refer to “Market”
on page 144.
Zinio: Launches a digital magazine reader. For more
information, refer to “Zinio” on page 166.
26
SimCity Deluxe: Provides an HD version of the popular
SimCity game. For more information, refer to “SimCity
Deluxe HD” on page 158.
Music: Play music and other audio files that you copy from
your computer. For more information, refer to “Music
App” on page 100.
Also, when you first turn on your tablet, there are various widgets
on the center Home screen and the Home screens to the left and
right of the center Home screen. For more information, refer to
“Widgets” on page 34.
Mini App Tray
JUNE
There are shortcuts available that link to apps that you might
need while working in other apps, such as your calendar, a
memo pad, and a calculator. In some cases, these shortcuts are
actually links to the part of the app you need most and they
contain link to the actual app where you can use other functions.
Open Mini App Tray
Calendar: Displays the calendar with today’s date
circled.
• Tap
to link to the Calendar app.
• Tap
to add a new event to your calendar.
• Tap
to close the app.
For more information, refer to “Calendar” on
page 132.
World Clock: Displays the time for the locations
you have set up.
Close Mini App Tray
1.
From any screen, tap
(Mini App Tray) at the bottom,
2.
Tap any of the following icons to display the associated
center of the screen.
application.
Task manager: Displays the Task manager.
Tap
to close this application. For more
information, refer to “Task Manager” on page 11.
• Tap
to link to the World Clock app.
• Tap
to close the app.
For more information, refer to “World Clock” on
page 162.
Pen memo: Displays the Pen memo app, which
you can use to create and save a memo.
• Tap
to link to the Pen memo app.
• Tap Done to save your memo.
• Tap
to close the app.
For more information, refer to “Pen Memo” on
page 153.
Understanding Your Device
27
Calculator: Displays a basic calculator.
• Tap
to close the app.
For more information, refer to “Calculator” on
page 131.
Music Player: Displays the music player.
• Tap
to link to the Music app.
• Tap
to display your songs list.
• Tap
to close the app.
The Apps screen holds all applications on your wireless device.
Applications that you download and install from the Android
Market or from the web are also added to the My apps screen.
The Apps icons are arranged in alphabetic order.
You can place shortcuts to applications on the Home screen for
quick access to the application. For more information, refer to
“Adding a Shortcut from the Apps Screen” on page 38.
28
From a Home screen, tap
Tap the My apps tab to view apps you have downloaded.
– or –
Tap an icon on the All or My apps screen to launch an
application.
Applications
The following is an alphabetical list of the applications that come
preloaded on your device.
Alarm
Apps Screen
1.
2.
(Apps).
Use Clock to display the date and time in large
characters on your screen and to set alarms to sound
once or on a repeating schedule. Schedule alarms to
remind you of appointments or events, or to wake up.
For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page 128.
Asphalt6
Provides access to a built-in HD racing video game. For
more information, refer to “Asphalt 6” on page 130.
Blio
Calendar
Blio® is an eReading application that presents eBooks
just like the printed version, in full color, and with all of
the features you’d want from an eReader.
Record events and appointments to manage your
schedule. For more information, refer to “Calendar” on
page 132.
For more information, refer to “Blio” on page 130.
Camera
Books
Take photos or record videos. A shortcut to Camera
appears on the Home screen by default. For more
information, refer to “Using the Camera” on page 83.
Read eBooks from the web-based Google Books
service. For more information, refer to “Books” on
page 130.
Browser
Access the Internet. A shortcut to Browser appears on
the Home screen by default. For more information, refer
to “Browser” on page 110.
Calculator
The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions
to solve simple arithmetic problems and advanced
operators to solve more complex problems. For more
information, refer to “Calculator” on page 131.
Contacts
Save and manage contact information for your friends
and colleagues. For more information, refer to
“Contacts” on page 53.
Downloads
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your
current downloaded files (Internet and Other). Use the
Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete what you
have downloaded. For more information, refer to
“Downloads” on page 134.
Understanding Your Device
29
Dropbox
Get Web Now
Provides access to your desktop files directly from your
device. For more information, refer to “Dropbox” on
page 135.
This is an applications that allows you to purchase prepaid Web minutes if you do not already have a monthly
data plan. For more information, refer to “Get Web
Now” on page 139.
eBook
Allows you access and read books on your device. For
more information, refer to “eBook” on page 136.
Email
Provides access to both your Outlook (Exchange Serverbased) work email and Internet email accounts (such as
Gmail and Yahoo! Mail). For more information, refer to
“Email” on page 73.
Files
Lets you view supported image files and text files on
your device. Organize and store data, images, and more
in your own personal file folders. Files are stored locally
in separate (user defined) folders. For more information,
refer to “Files” on page 137.
Gallery
View and manage photos stored on your device. For
more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 94.
30
Gmail
Provides access to your Gmail account. Google Mail
(Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your device. For more
information, refer to “Gmail” on page 71.
Google Search
Use the Google search engine to search the internet
and your device. A shortcut to Google Search appears
on a Home screen by default. For more information,
refer to “Google Search” on page 140.
Latitude
Use Google Latitude to locate your friends on a map and
share or hide your location. For more information, refer
to “Latitude” on page 140.
Maps
Messaging
Find locations and get directions with Google maps. A
shortcut to Maps appears on the Home screen by
default. For more information, refer to “Maps” on
page 142.
Provides access to text and multimedia messaging
(SMS and MMS). For more information, refer to
“Creating and Sending Messages” on page 65.
Market
Browse, download, and install Android applications. A
shortcut to Market appears on the Home screen by
default. For more information, refer to “Market” on
page 144.
Media Hub
Provides you with a one stop shop for the hottest movie
and TV content. You can now rent or purchase your
favorite content and then watch it from the convenience
of anywhere. For more information, refer to “Media
Hub” on page 98.
Memo
MobileLife Organizer
Organizes your family’s calendar, family shopping list,
To-Do list, and Journal entries in one place. For more
information, refer to “MobileLife Organizer” on
page 147.
Music
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your
computer. For more information, refer to “Music App”
on page 100.
Music player
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your
computer. For more information, refer to “Music Player”
on page 105.
Create text memos and use Bluetooth to send memos.
For more information, refer to “Memo” on page 146.
Understanding Your Device
31
My Account
Photo editor
Provides you with account specific information such as:
current status, Activity, Set Alerts, Bill Summary, Plan
Services, and FAQ’s Info. For more information, refer to
“My Account” on page 149.
To perfect any photos stored on your tablet, use Photo
editor to crop, rotate, resize, adjust color and contrast,
and much more. For more information, refer to “Photo
Editor” on page 154.
My Device
Places
Allows you to configure device settings, view Personalize
your Wallpapers, View Quick Tools, Support, and battery
storage information. For more information, refer to “My
Device” on page 150.
Use Google Maps to find places of interest, plus add
your own favorite places. For more information, refer to
“Places” on page 154.
Navigation
Provides access to compatible productivity tools. For
more information, refer to “Pro Apps” on page 155.
Use Google Maps Navigation to search for locations,
with turn-by-turn directions. For more information, refer
to “Navigation” on page 151.
Pen memo
This app is not only useful, but lots of fun, if you like to
draw. Pen memo lets you type memos or draw pictures.
For more information, refer to “Pen Memo” on
page 153.
32
Pro Apps
Pulse
Pulse News gives you news visually in bite-sized
pieces. For more information, refer to “Pulse” on
page 155.
Qello
Qello® brings the concert right to the fan. This is an HD
streaming rental service of the world's largest catalog
of HD live concerts. For more information, refer to
“Qello” on page 156.
Quickoffice HD
Social Hub
The Quickoffice application allows you to create and
save Microsoft Word, Excel, and Powerpoint
documents. You can also view existing PDFs. For more
information, refer to “Quickoffice HD” on page 156.
Allows you to easily and intuitively satisfy all of your
communication needs from within a single-user
interface. E-mails, instant messaging, social network
contents, and calendar contents from all major service
providers are available. For more information, refer to
“Social Hub” on page 159.
Security
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your
computer. For more information, refer to “Security” on
page 158.
Settings
Configure your device to your preferences. For more
information, refer to “Settings” on page 158.
SimCity Deluxe HD
Provides an HD version of the popular SimCity game.
For more information, refer to “SimCity Deluxe HD” on
page 158.
Slacker
Slacker® offers free, internet radio for mobile devices.
For more information, refer to “Slacker” on page 159.
T-Mobile TV
Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your device.
This application is a subscription service. For more
information, refer to “T-Mobile TV” on page 160.
Talk
Launches a Web-based Google Talk application that lets
you chat with family and friends over the Internet for
free. For more information, refer to “Talk” on
page 160.
TegraZone Games
Tegra Zone® Games is an Android app for your NVIDIA®
Tegra™-powered mobile device, you can easily find
games that are optimized to exploit the full potential of
your device’s built-in Tegra mobile processor. For more
information, refer to “TegraZone Games” on page 160.
Understanding Your Device
33
Video Chat
World Clock
Allows you to record and share live videos on your device
with your friends, family, and your favorite social
networks. For more information, refer to “Video Chat” on
page 161.
View the date and time in any time zone. For more
information, refer to “World Clock” on page 162.
Video player
Play and manage videos stored on your tablet. A
shortcut to Video appears on the Home screen by
default. For more information, refer to “Video Player”
on page 90.
Videos
Use the Videos app to view movies you rent from the
Android Market or play any of your personal videos
stored on your tablet. For more information, refer to
“Videos” on page 162.
Voice Search
Launches your device’s built-in voice recognition
software and initiates a Google search based on the
recognized text. For more information, refer to “Voice
Search” on page 162.
34
YouTube
View and upload YouTube videos, right from your
device. A shortcut to YouTube appears on the Home
screen by default. For more information, refer to
“YouTube” on page 165.
Zinio
Launches a digital magazine reader. Zinio® has
transformed your favorite print magazines into digital
format. For more information, refer to “Zinio” on
page 166.
Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that you can place on
any screen with available space. These Widgets help you quickly
access your favorite features.
Adding Widgets to a current screen
1.
Widget to be placed.
2.
4.
In a single motion, touch and drag the Widget from the tab
and into then into the desired screen.
Navigate to the Home screen on which you want the
Widget tab Destination Screen
Currently Active Screen
Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
– or –
Tap
(Customize). The Add to Home screen options
screen displays.
3.
Tap the Widgets tab, then select a Widget to add it to the
current screen. The current screen is indicated by a blue
box around it.
4.
Tap
(Back) to return to the previous screen.
Note: Swipe across the screen horizontally to view all Widgets.
Adding Widgets to multiple screens
1.
Navigate to the Home screen on which you want the
Widget to be placed.
5.
1.
2.
Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
3.
Tap the Widgets tab.
Tap
(Back) to return to the previous screen.
Removing Widgets
Touch and hold the Widget until it appears to become
“unpinned” from its current screen and
(Remove)
appears at the top right corner of the screen.
Understanding Your Device
35
2.
Drag the Widget to the Remove icon and release it.
Available Widgets
The following widgets are available:
• AccuWeather.com: Display the forecast from AccuWeather.
Touch the widget to choose locations.
• Agenda: Create new events and display your agenda of events. Events
also display on the calendar.
• Analog clock: Display an analog clock. Tap the widget to view alarms
or add a new alarm. For more information, refer to “Alarm” on
page 128.
• Ap Mobile: Displays Top Stories and Showbiz, Sports, World, and U.S.
news from Ap Mobile.
• Bonus Apps: Displays free T-Mobile services and apps that are
compatible with your device.
• Bookmark: Provides a shortuct to the Bookmarks page.
36
• Bookmarks: Display your bookmarked websites as scrollable
mini-window. Sweep up or down to view all bookmarks and tap an
entry to open the website. For more information, refer to “Using
Bookmarks” on page 112.
• Books: Access your books. For more information, refer to “Books” on
page 130.
• Buddies now: Add this widget and then touch it to choose a buddy.
The next time you tap the widget, you can view the buddy’s contact
information, send an email, view your buddy’s location on a map, or
open their webpage.
• Calendar: Display a calendar. For more information, refer to
“Calendar” on page 132.
• Contact: Display a link to one of your contacts to quickly compose an
Email or Gmail message. For more information, refer to “Messaging”
on page 65.
• Digital clock: Display the digital time, the day, and the date.
• Dual clock: Display the date and time for two different locations.
For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page 128.
• Email: Display your email inbox. For more information, refer to
“Email” on page 73.
• Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based email.
For more information, refer to “Gmail” on page 71.
• Google Search: Display a Google Search bar. For more information,
refer to “Google Search” on page 140.
• Latitude: Accesses the Latitude application. For more information,
• Pulse (small): Lets you add a topical Pulse widget, like Pulse (large),
refer to “Latitude” on page 140.
• Market: Download applications from the Android Market. For more
information, refer to “Market” on page 144.
• MobileLife: Provides access to various MobileLife applications such as
Calendar and Shopping List. Options include: MobileLife
Calendar(2x3)(3x3) (4x2) (4x4), MobileLife Shopping List(3x3)(4x4),
MobileLife To Do List(3x3)(4x4). For more information, refer to
“MobileLife Organizer” on page 147.
• Month: Access an on-screen calendar. For more information, refer to
“Calendar” on page 132.
• Music: Access the Music app music player controls. For more
information, refer to “Music App” on page 100.
• Picture frame: Display an on-screen picture frame.
• Program monitor: Display the number of active applications.
Tap to launch Task Manager. For more information, refer to
“Task Manager” on page 11.
• Pulse (large): Lets you add a topical Pulse widget. Choices are: Pulse
Hints, Time Magazine, Cool Hunting, CNN Money, SB Nation, Fortune
Tech, The Wall Street Journal, and Facebook Links.
– Touch your choice and then tap Save. Pulse article titles and the first
lines of an article are displayed.
– Tap the title block to display that article’s first lines.
– Tap the introduction area to link to the article in Pulse. For more
information, refer to “Pulse” on page 155.
but only the article titles are displayed. Tap a title block to link to the
article in Pulse. For more information, refer to “Pulse” on page 155.
• Security: Launches the Security application. For more information,
refer to “Security” on page 158.
• Slacker Radio: Access your social networks, like Facebook,
Twitter, and LinkedIn all in one place. For more information, refer
to “Slacker” on page 159.
• Social Hub: Access your social networks, like Facebook, Twitter,
and LinkedIn all in one place. For more information, refer to
“Social Hub” on page 159.
• Today: Displays an on-screen agenda of your activities for today. For
more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 132.
• Traffic: Installs the Traffic component of the Maps application. For
more information, refer to “Maps” on page 142.
• Yahoo! Finance: Search for and add stocks. For more
information, refer to “Yahoo Finance” on page 163.
• YouTube: Search YouTube and watch videos. For more information,
refer to “YouTube” on page 165.
Understanding Your Device
37
App Shortcuts
Use App Shortcuts for quick access to applications or features,
such as Email or other applications.
Adding a Shortcut from the Apps Screen
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Touch and hold on an application icon until the Home
Adding Shortcuts to a Screen
1.
(Apps).
screen selection area is displayed at the bottom of the
Navigate to the screen on which you want the App
screen.
Shortcut to be placed.
2.
Touch and hold on the screen.
– or –
Tap
(Customize). The Add to Home screen options
screen is displayed.
3.
Tap the App shortcuts tab, then touch an application to add
it to the current screen (indicated by a blue box).
For a list of applications, see “Apps Screen” on page 28
4.
Tap
(Back) to return to the Home screen.
3.
Drag the application icon to the desired screen. Once over
the screen it is highlighted and the selected page opens
up.
4.
Drag the application icon approximately where you want it
on the current page.
38
Removing App Shortcuts
1.
In a single motion, touch and hold the App Shortcut until
becomes “un-pinned” from the page and
(Remove)
appears at the top right corner of the screen.
2.
Drag the App Shortcut over to the Remove icon and
release.
Wallpapers
You can choose a picture to display in the background of the
Home screen. Choose from preloaded wallpaper images or select
a photo you have downloaded or taken with the Camera.
1.
From a Home screen, touch and hold on the screen.
– or –
Tap
(Customize). The Add to Home screen options
• Live Wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded interactive animated
wallpapers. Tap a wallpaper to see an example.
If available, tap Settings to view options for the selection. Tap Set
wallpaper to save your choice. Tap Cancel to return to the
Wallpaper menu.
• Wallpapers: Tap to display the Set as pop-up and then select
Home screen Wallpaper or Lock screen Wallpaper. Choose from
pre-loaded wallpaper images.
Tap an image to save it as wallpaper. Tap Cancel to return to the
Wallpaper menu.
4. Tap
(Back) to return to the Home screen.
More
The final Add to Home screen option, More, includes shortcuts to
Browser bookmarks, to Directions and Navigation, and an
assortment of other useful items.
1.
screen is displayed.
From a Home screen, touch and hold on the screen.
– or –
2.
Tap the Wallpapers tab to view the Wallpaper menu.
Tap
3.
Choose a source for images:
screen is displayed.
• Gallery: Tap to display the Set as pop-up and then select Home
screen Wallpaper or Lock screen Wallpaper. Access the Gallery
to choose a picture.
Tap a picture to select it, then crop and resize the picture, if desired.
Tap OK to save the picture as wallpaper. Tap X to cancel.
2.
(Customize). The Add to Home screen options
Tap More to view the additional widgets:
• Bookmark: Launch a bookmarked webpage.
• Contact: View a contact you specify.
Understanding Your Device
39
• Directions & Navigation: Get directions and navigation from
Google Maps. For more information, refer to “Maps” on
page 142.
• Dropbox folder: Works to provide access to your desktop files
directly from your device. For more information, refer to
“Dropbox” on page 135.
• Email account: Access an Email account. Appears once an Email
account is set up. If you have more than one Email account set up,
touch the one to which you want to link. For more information, refer
to “Email” on page 73.
• Gmail label: Access a Gmail label. Appears once a Gmail account
is set up. Touch the label to which you want to link. For more
information, refer to “Gmail” on page 71.
• Kies via Wi-Fi: Allows computers running the KIES software to
access your tablet. Both the tablet and the computer have to be on
the same Wi-Fi network.
• Music playlist: Choose a music playlist to access from a home
screen. For more information, refer to “Music Player” on
page 105.
• Select settings: Displays a list of Settings shortcuts. Touch an entry
in the list. For more information, refer to “Settings” on page 167.
40
Section 3: Entering Text
This section describes how to enter words, letters, punctuation
and numbers when you need to enter text.
Virtual QWERTY Keyboard
Your device uses a virtual QWERTY keyboard for text entry. Use
the keyboard to enter letters, punctuation, numbers, and other
characters into text entry fields or applications. Access the
keyboard by touching any text entry field.
The virtual QWERTY keyboard displays at the bottom of the
screen. By default, when you rotate the device, the screen
orientation updates to display the keyboard at the bottom of the
screen.
Enabling Accessibility settings
1.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
➔ Accessibility.
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
Tap Accessibility to activate or deactivate accessibility
services. When activated, a check mark appears in the
box.
3.
Tap TalkBack to activate or deactivate TalkBack services.
4.
Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap OK.
For more information, refer to “Accessibility” on page 195.
Text Input Methods
Your device offers several text input methods. This section
explains two of them.
Note: Samsung keypad is the default input method.
• Swype: Swype is a new text input method that allows you to enter
Swype Keyboard
words by gliding your finger over the virtual QWERTY keyboard, lifting
your finger between words. You can also enable Word prediction,
which matches your key touches to common words.
Entering Text
41
• Samsung Keypad: The Samsung Keypad is a virtual QWERTY
keyboard that allows you to enter text by tapping keys on the screen.
The Samsung Keypad includes predictive text, which matches your
key touches to common words so that you can select the word to enter
it into your text.
• Android Keyboard: This input method provides a virtual QWERTY
keyboard that is similar to that if a Samsung keypad and allows you to
enter text by tapping keys on the screen.
• Android Keyboard - Voice: This method uses a speech-to-text
method of text input relying on Google’s speech regognition
technology.
Changing the Input Method
When entering text within an input field, you can select the text
input method.
1.
Tap
(Configure Input Methods) from the bottom-right
of the screen within the Status bar. The Configure input
methods pop-up is displayed.
Input Methods
The Android Keyboard is also a virtual QWERTY keyboard. For
more information about the Android Keyboard, the English (US)
Keyboard, and the TalkBack keyboard see “Configure Input
Methods” on page 193.
Input Settings
Configure
Input Methods
2.
Tap an input method to activate it.
3.
Tap
to display that input method’s settings.
For more information, refer to “Configure Input Methods” on
page 193.
42
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype is a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead of
touching each key, use your finger to trace over each letter of a
word. For each word, place your finger on the first letter and glide
to the subsequent letters, lifting on the last letter.
This example shows how to enter the word “this”. Put your finger
down on the “t” and, without lifting, glide it to the “h”, then to the
“i”, then over to the “s”.
• Capitalization: Swype recognizes and capitalizes the first word of
sentences. If you want to capitalize a word that is not at the beginning
of a sentence, just glide above the keyboard before gliding over the
next letter.
• Contractions: Swype recognizes most words that include an
apostrophe; just swype the letters of the word, including the
apostrophe.
• Punctuation: Touch and hold a key to view a punctuation menu and
make a selection.
• Accented characters: Just glide through the letters of the word.
Swype usually recognizes the word and correctly accents the letters.
• Error correction: If you make a mistake, double-tap on the word you
want to change.
Configuring Swype
Here are a few tips to get you started:
• Spacing is automatic: When you finish a word, just lift your finger and
start the next word.
• Double letters: Just “scribble” on the key.
Configure Swype to your preferences.
• For more information, refer to “Configure Input Methods” on
page 193.
• While entering text, touch and hold
(Swype Key) and then tap
Settings.
Swype Help
While entering text, you can get tips and help about using Swype.
• Touch and hold
(Swype Key) and then tap Tutorial for an
interactive tutorial.
Entering Text
43
Using Swype Speech Recognition
Enter text by speaking. Swype recognizes your speech and
enters text for you.
䊳
Tap
. At the Speak now prompt, speak the text you
want to enter.
Entering Letters in Swype
In ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few common
punctuation marks from the on-screen keyboard. The text mode
key shows
.
1.
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
2.
Tap
Editing Keyboard
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.n.
The Editing Keyboard provides a quick way to move the cursor
and highlight text. If the application in which you are working
supports editing, you can cut, copy, or paste highlighted text.
䊳
Swype from the
(Numeric Key).
➔
Once in this mode, the text input type shows
.
(Swype Key) to the
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
– or –
Tap
to configure the keyboard for ABC mode
(showing letters and numbers on the on-screen keys).
.
3.
key changes to
Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a
word.
– If you make a mistake, tap
and hold
4.
44
to erase a single character. Touch
to erase an entire word.
Tap Send to send the message.
To enter text via Swype:
All lowercase
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase. Pressing this while in 123 mode, reveals
additional numeric-symbols keys.
Initial Uppercase
Displays when the first character of each word is
entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters
are lowercase.
All Uppercase
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you
lift your finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the
word.
To explain entering the word “there”.
– Put your finger down on the “t”, and without lifting, glide it to the “h”,
and then to the “e”, and then over to the “r”, and back to the “e”.
– When complete, lift your finger off the screen to allow the device to
determine the closest word match.
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an on-screen
popup appears to provide additional word choices.
Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE
By using the on-screen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols
are not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys). In SYM mode
using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers from
the on-screen keyboard. Once in SYM mode, the text mode key
shows
.
Tap
to switch to the symbols keyboard. Tap
additional symbols.
1.
to view
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2.
Tap
to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once in
this mode, the text input type shows
.
Entering Text
45
3.
Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want
to enter.
4.
Touch and hold an on-screen key to enter the secondary
symbol (above the main one on the same key).
5.
Tap
to choose from additional symbols.
For example:
• To enter &: tap
• To enter &: tap
or
To enter &: tap
and select the & key.
and draw a small circle over the & key.
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keypad
The Samsung Keypad is a custom virtual QWERTY keyboard,
featuring predictive text. Using the QWERTY keypad/ keyboard,
you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other characters.
As you enter characters, predictive text matches your key
touches to common words and displays them. Select a word
from the display to insert it into your text.
Your tablet also provides handwriting recognition to make the
task of text entry that much easier.
New
Paragraph
and touch and hold the & key.
Shift
Key
Keypad Space Bar
Settings
Text Input Mode
46
Emoticons
Handwriting pad
Delete
Key
Attachment
Configuring the Keypad
Entering Upper and Lower Case Letters
To configure the Samsung Keypad to your preferences:
䊳
While entering text, tap
(Settings).
The Samsung keypad settings screen is displayed. For
more information, refer to “Configure Input Methods” on
page 193.
The default case is lower case (abc). Enter upper and lower case
alphabet letters by tapping the Shift key
to toggle the case,
before touching the letter key(s).
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
key changes to
Changing the Text Input Mode in Keypad
1.
2.
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
All lowercase
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase. Pressing this while in 123 mode, reveals
additional numeric-symbols keys.
With Samsung keypad as your text entry method, select
one of the following text mode options:
• Abc ABC : to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen
keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays
.
• Symbol/Numeric
: to enter numbers by pressing the
numbers selecting them on the onscreen keyboard. In this mode,
the text mode button displays ABC .
There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symbols available by
tapping
.
Initial Uppercase
Displays when the first character of each word is
entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters
are lowercase.
All Uppercase
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
Entering Text
47
By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the
cursor automatically advances to the next space.
Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keypad
1.
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key displays ABC .
1.
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the device
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2.
Tap
ABC
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.
to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once in
this mode, the text input type shows
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
key changes to
Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.
– If you make a mistake, tap
and hold
4.
48
to erase a single character. Touch
to erase an entire word.
Tap Send to send the message.
2.
.
Important!: Some keys provide alternate text options (ex:W key).
In those cases where touching a holding a key does not insert the
desired text or symbol indicated on the top of the key, try tapping
the Shift key first then select the desired key again.
3.
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
Tap
to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode. Once
in this mode, the text input type shows
ABC .
3.
Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.
4.
Tap
ABC
to return to ABC mode.
To enter symbols:
1.
Tap
to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode.
2.
Tap the appropriate symbol key.
– or –
Tap
button to cycle through additional pages.
• The first number on this key indicates which page (1, 2, or 3) of
additional characters is active.
Using XT9 Predictive Text
XT9 is a predictive text system (available within the Samsung
keypad) that has next-letter prediction and regional error
correction.
1.
Tap
(Settings) at the bottom of the keypad.
The Samsung keypad settings screen displays.
Note: XT9 advanced settings are available only if the XT9 field has been
selected.
2.
Set any of the following options:
• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from the
available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language.
• XT9 enables predictive text entry mode. This must be enabled to
gain access to the advanced settings.
• XT9 advanced settings configuration of more advanced XT9
features. For more information, refer to “Using XT9 Predictive
Text” on page 50.
• Automatic full stop automatically inserts a full stop by tapping the
space bar twice.
• Sound on keypress automatically plays a sound when an onscreen key is pressed.
• Auto-capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the
first word in each sentence (standard English style).
• Voice input activates the Voice input feature. This is an
experimental feature that uses Google’s networked speech
recognition application.
• Handwriting settings allows you to configure the on-screen
handwriting recognition settings such as: Recognition time, Pen
thickness, Pen color, Recognition type, Gesture Guide, and About.
• Tutorial launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main
concepts related to the Samsung keypad.
Entering Text
49
Using XT9 Predictive Text
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and
regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing
the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.
1.
Tap
2.
Tap the XT9 field. A checkmark indicates activation.
(Settings) at the bottom of the keypad.
Note: The XT9 option is available only when Abc mode has been selected.
3.
Tap the XT9 advanced settings field and configure any of
the following advanced options:
• Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to
complete the word you have started. (A green check mark indicates
the feature is enabled.)
• Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered
before a word prediction is made. Choose from 2 letters, 3 letters,
4 letters, or 5 letters.
• Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical
errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the
characters of the keys you touched, and those of nearby
characters. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter.
(A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
50
• Auto-substitution allows the device to automatically replace
misspelled or miskeyed words. This option reduce “typos.” (A green
check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused
when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys. (A green check
mark indicates the feature is enabled.
• Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list
after selecting the wrong word from the list.
• XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built-in XT9
dictionary.
– Tap
(Menu) ➔ Add.
– Use the Edit XT9 my words field to enter the new word.
– Tap Add to store the new word.
• XT9 auto-substitution allows you create a word rule by adding
words for automatic substitution during text entry (for example
youve becomes you’ve).
– Tap the XT9 auto-substitution field. Flick up or down to review the
current list of word substitutions.
– Tap
(Menu) ➔ Add.
– Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field (for
example, youve).
– Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field (for
example, you?fve).
– Tap Add to save the substitution rule.
4. Tap
to return to the previous screen.
Using the Predictive Word feature
1.
Begin typing a word. A list of word options displays. Tap
one of the words to replace the word that has already been
typed.
– or –
Tap
and then touch Add word to register a new word
to XT9.
Editing Text
You can edit the text you enter in text fields by cutting, copying,
or pasting text. These operations can be performed within and
across apps. However, some apps do not support editing some or
all of the text displayed while others may offer their own way to
select text.
Editing Existing Text
To edit text that you have entered:
1.
Tap the text at the point you want to edit.
The
2.
Cursor displays at the point you touched.
Touch and drag the Cursor to a better position, if
necessary.
3.
Enter additional text or delete text by repeatedly tapping
(Delete).
2.
Continue typing your message. XT9 mode can be used in
portrait or landscape mode.
Copying, Deleting, or Replacing Text
To select and copy, delete, or replace text:
1.
Touch hold the text or word you want to select.
The selected text is highlighted with a
tab at each
end of the selection.
Entering Text
51
2.
Touch and drag either
tab to select more or less
text.
䊳
Tip: Touch Select all in the Application bar to select all text in the field. Touch
on another area of the screen or touch X Cancel to unselect the text.
3.
Closing the Keyboard
Depending on the action you want to take for the selected
Tap
(Close Keyboard).
Using Speech Recognition
You can use your voice to enter text using the Voice input feature,
which lets you enter text by speaking. Samsung Keypad
recognizes your speech and enters text for you.
text, in the Application bar tap Cut to remove the selected
text, Copy to save the selected text to the clipboard, or
Note: To enable Voice Input, tap
Settings ➔ Voice input. For more
information, refer to “Configure Input Methods” on page 193.
Clipboard to replace the selected text with text previously
saved to the clipboard.
1.
Tap
– or –
2.
At the Speak now prompt, speak clearly and distinctly into
Enter text by typing or speaking to replace the selection
the microphone. Working... is displayed while the software
with what you type.
is converting your voice to text. The text is displayed in the
message.
– or –
Tap
(Delete) to erase the selected text.
Pasting Text
To paste previously copied text where the cursor is positioned:
1.
Tap the text at the point you want to paste the copied text.
The Cursor displays at the point you touched.
2.
52
(Speech Recognition) on the Samsung keypad.
Touch and hold the Cursor and tap Paste in the pop-up.
3.
Tap
(Speech Recognition) again to speak and add
more text.
Note: The feature works best when you break your message down into
smaller segments and work in an environment with little background
noise.
Section 4: Contacts and Accounts
This section explains how to manage contacts and accounts.
Accounts
Your device can synchronize with a variety of accounts. With
synchronization, information on your device is updated with any
information that changes in your accounts.
• Facebook: Add your Facebook account to sync Contacts.
• LinkedIn: Add your LinkedIn account to sync data with LinkedIn.
• Twitter: Add your Twitter SNS Service to sync Contacts.
• Blio (T-Mobile): Add your Blio account to sync and access your data.
• Email: Add and Email account to sync Contacts. For more information,
refer to “Email” on page 73.
• Google Accounts: Add your Google account to sync your Contacts,
Calendar, and Gmail. For more information, refer to “Gmail” on
page 71.
• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync: Add your Exchange account to sync
Contacts, Calendar, and Email.
• Samsung account: Add your Samsung account.
• T-Mobile Contacts: Add your T-Mobile Backup service to sync your
Contacts.
• Video Chat: Add your Video chat account to sync information.
Setting Up Your Accounts
Set up and manage your synchronized accounts with the
Accounts and sync setting.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
2.
Tap
3.
Follow the prompts to enter your account credentials to
(Add account), then tap the account type.
complete the set-up process.
4.
The device communicates with account servers to set up
your account. When complete, your account appears in the
Manage accounts area of the Accounts and sync screen.
Contacts
Store contact information for your friends, family, and colleagues
to quickly access information or to send a message.
To access Contacts:
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
Contacts and Accounts
53
Creating Contacts
1.
From a Home screen, tap
Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected
destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google account
destination type).
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
• Internet call: Enter an Internet call number.
2.
Tap
(New) to create a contact.
3.
Tap an account or Device.
4.
Tap the Photo ID to set up a photo to identify the contact.
• Album: Choose a photo from the Gallery.
• Take photo: Display the Camera and take a photo of the contact.
5. Tap contact fields to display the keyboard and enter
information:
Tip: Tap the screen and swipe up or down to display additional fields or tap
Next on the keypad to move to the next field.
• Given name: Enter a first name for the contact.
• Family name: Enter a last name for the contact. Tap
Name prefix, Middle name, and Name suffix.
to enter a
• Phone number: Enter a telephone number, then tap the
Label
tab to choose a label from Mobile, Home, Work, Work Fax, Home
Fax, Pager, Other, Custom (to create a custom label), or Callback.
54
• Email: Enter an email address, then tap the
Label tab to
choose a label from Work, Home, Other, or Custom to create a
custom label.
• Instant messenger: Enter an IM address, then tap the
Label
tab to choose a label from Google Talk, AIM, Windows Live,
Yahoo, Skype, QQ, ICQ, Jabber, and Custom.
• Groups: Assign the contact to a group, then tap the
Label tab
to choose a group from Not assigned, Co-workers, Family,
Friends, and so on. For more information about Groups, see
“Groups” on page 61.
• Address: Enter an address, then tap the
Label tab to choose a
label from Home, Work, Other, or Custom to create a custom
label.
• Organization: Enter a company name and job title.
6.
Tap
to add additional fields.
– or –
Tap
1.
on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously
entered phone number.
7.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
to remove an unused field.
– or –
Tap
Updating Contacts
2.
Tap a contact in the Contacts list to view its information.
3.
Tap
Contact List
(Menu) ➔ Edit.
Contact Overview
Add new Delete Menu
Tap Add another field to add these additional fields:
Phonetic name, Phone number, Email, Instant messenger,
Address, Notes, Website, Event, Relationship and Nickname.
8.
Tap
(Back) to remove the keyboard.
9.
When you finish entering information, tap Done.
Tip: Display a contact’s record and tap the Email field to send an email, tap
the Address field to display the address on a map, or tap the Website
field to link to the website.
4.
Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.
• Tap
on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously
entered phone number.
Contacts and Accounts
55
• Tap
5.
to enter an additional phone number
• Tap
to remove a previously entered phone number.
Edit the contact information then tap Done. For more
information, refer to “Creating Contacts” on page 54.
Deleting Contacts
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
2.
Tap a contact in the Contacts list to view its information,
3.
Tap OK to confirm the deletion.
and then tap
(Delete).
Managing Photo IDs
To remove or update a contact’s Photo ID:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
56
2.
Tap a contact in the Contacts list.
3.
Tap
4.
Tap the Photo ID, then tap Album, Take photo, or Remove.
(Menu) ➔ Edit.
Contact Menu Options
There are various ways to display your Contacts and general
Contacts settings.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap Contacts, Favorites, or Groups above the Contacts List,
Contacts.
to view contacts various ways:
• Contacts: Show all your contacts.
– Tap the Search contacts field and enter a keyword to list contacts that
contain that keyword.
• Favorites: Show only your favorite, or starred, contacts. For more
information, refer to “Favorites” on page 63.
• Groups: Tap the
Label tab displayed above the Contacts List
to display the possible Groups, such as Not assigned, Co-workers,
Family, Friends, and so on. Tap a group name to show only contacts
in that group. For more information, refer to “Creating a New
Group” on page 61.
3. From the Contacts or Favorites list, tap
(Menu) to
display all or some of these options:
• Edit: Make changes to update an existing contact.
• Delete contacts. Tap and check mark the box next to each contact
you want to delete. Tap Delete ➔ OK.
• View SNS friends: Tap Add account to add a new account or tap
an existing account to get contacts from your friends on Facebook
or LinkedIn.
• Sync contacts: Sync contacts with their account information.
• Import/Export: Use the USB cable to import your contacts from, or
export your contacts to, a storage device, such as a PC. For more
information, refer to “Importing and Exporting Contacts” on
page 60.
• Join contact: Join a contact to one or more other contacts. For
more information, refer to “Joining Contacts” on page 58.
• My profile: Set up information for yourself similar to the way you
add a new contact. For more information, refer to “Creating
Contacts” on page 54.
• Set default: If a contact has multiple email addresses, for example,
tap the field that should be the default value.
• Send namecard via: Allows you to send the current Contact entry’s
information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth, Dropbox,
Email (Exchange or Internet), Gmail, or Messaging.
• Print namecard: Check mark the fields you want to print and then
tap Print. You can only print on a Samsung printer.
• Settings
Display options: Set the following Display options:
– Only contacts with phones: Tap to check the box to only display
contacts that have phone numbers.
– List by: List contacts by Given name or Family name.
– Display contacts by: Set whether contact names should appear in the
Contacts List as Given name first or Family name first.
– Select contacts to display: Set how your contacts display base on
the accounts with which they are associated.
General settings: Set the following Display options:
– Save new contact to: Set the default location for new contacts.
Options are: Always ask, Device, or an account, such as you Gmail
account.
– Service number: Displays your current service numbers for 411 &
More, Customer Care, and Voice Mail.
Send contacts: Sets parameters for sending
contact information:
– Send all namecards: Allows you to transmitt all of your current
Contact entries at a single time. If the receipient device does not support
this feature, some or all Contact entries might not be received.
– Send individual namecards: Allows you to transmitt single contacts,
one at a time. The recipient must accept each namecard as it is
received. This method of transmission ensures all contacts are recieved.
4. From the Groups list, tap
(Menu) to display these
options:
• Send message: To send a new outgoing message to one or more
members of the group, tap and check mark the box next to each
contact you want to send to and tap Send.
• Send email: To send an email to one or more members of the
group, tap and check mark the box next to each contact you want
to send to and tap Send. Tap Compose or Email as the method for
sending the email.
Contacts and Accounts
57
Joining Contact Information
4.
Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
Your device can synchronize with multiple accounts, including
Google, Corporate Exchange, and other email providers. When
you synchronize contacts from these accounts with your device,
you may have multiple contacts for one person.
Linking, or joining, imported contact records allows you to see all
the contact’s numbers and addresses together in one contact
entry. Linking also helps you keep your contacts updated,
because any changes that your contacts make to their
information in the respective accounts is automatically updated
the next time you synchronize with the account.
(the entry in which to link).
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one
record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.
Important!: It is the second contact image that is displayed for both, but the
first contact’s name that is used.
For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie (second
entry). Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains. Tap the
Amy entry (showing the Julie image) to view both.
5.
From a Home screen, tap
page 59.
6.
2.
3.
Tap a contact in the Contacts list to view its information.
Tap
The joined contact’s information is displayed with the
original contact’s information.
Unjoining a Contact
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
(Menu) ➔ Join contact.
2.
58
Tap Join.These contacts are now linked with the first and
the account information is merged into one screen.
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
Assign a primary entry by tapping Set as primary. For more
information, refer to “Marking a Contact as Primary” on
Joining Contacts
1.
Tap the selected contact entries from the list on the left
Tap a contact in the Contacts list to view its information.
3.
Tap
(Menu) ➔ Join contact, then tap
to separate
joined contacts.
4.
You can send a contact’s information by way of Bluetooth to other
Bluetooth devices or in an Email or Gmail as an attachment.
Tap Join.
Marking a Contact as Primary
When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other
messaging type applications, the application needs to know
which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For
example, when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three
phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the
“default” number or entry.
The Set as primary option marks one entry in a contact record to
use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple
entries for the same person.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
Sharing Contact Information
Note: Not all Bluetooth devices accept contacts and not all devices support
transfers of multiple contacts. Check the target device’s
documentation.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2.
Tap
3.
3.
Tap
4.
Assign a primary entry by tapping Set as primary ➔ Join.
(Menu) ➔ Join contact.
Tap the check box next to each contact you want to choose
or tap the Select all check box.
(Contacts).
Tap a contact in the Contacts list to view its information.
(Menu) ➔ Send namecard via.
Tip: Set up a contact record for yourself to share your information with
others.
(Apps) ➔
2.
(Apps) ➔
4.
Tap Send.
5.
At the prompt, choose a sending method, then follow the
prompts to send the contact information:
• Bluetooth: For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on
page 115.
• Dropbox: For more information, refer to “Dropbox” on
page 135.
Contacts and Accounts
59
• Email: For more information, refer to “Email” on page 73.
• Gmail: For more information, refer to “Composing and Sending
Gmail” on page 72.
• Messaging: For more information, refer to “Messaging” on
page 65.
Importing and Exporting Contacts
To back up and restore your contacts information, you can export
your contacts list to a storage device, such as a PC, or import
your contacts list (previously exported) from a storage device.
Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts list is your device’s built-in memory. This procedure
allows you to copy numbers saved to the device’s memory, onto
the SIM card.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
2.
60
Tap
(Menu) ➔ Import/Export ➔ Export to SIM card.
3.
Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries.
– or –
Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark
indicates a selection.
4.
Tap Copy or Move. The name and phone number for the
selected contact is then copied to the SIM.
Copying Contact Information to the USB Storage
1.
Use the USB cable to connect your device to the storage
device.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
(Menu) ➔ Import/Export.
3.
Tap
4.
Tap Import from USB storage or Export to USB storage, then
follow the prompts to complete the operation.
Groups
Renaming a Group
Assign contacts to Groups to make searching for contacts faster
or to quickly send messages to group members.
Creating a New Group
Create a new group when you add or edit a contact.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
1.
(Contacts).
Tap the Groups tab from the top of the page.
3.
Tap
4.
Tap the Group name field and use the keyboard to enter a
(New).
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
2.
Tap the Groups tab from the top of the page.
3.
Tap the
(Apps) ➔
2.
From a Home screen, tap
Label tab displayed above the Contacts List to
display the possible Groups.
4.
Tap the Group you want to rename.
5.
Tap
6.
Use the keyboard to enter a new group name.
7.
Tap Done to save the new group name.
(Menu) ➔ Edit group.
new Group name.
5.
Tap Done to save the new group name.
Tip: Contacts can belong to more than one group. Just tap the contact’s
Groups field and tap each group.
Once you create a new group, the Contacts List can be set to
display only the contacts in that group. For more information,
refer to “Contact Menu Options” on page 56.
Contacts and Accounts
61
Deleting a Group
1.
Adding Group Members
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
2.
Tap the Groups tab from the top of the page.
3.
Tap the
Label tab displayed above the Contacts List to
display the possible Groups.
4.
Tap any Group.
5.
Tap
(Menu) ➔ Delete groups.
The groups that can be deleted are displayed.
6.
Tap the check box next to each group you want to delete.
7.
Tap Done to delete the groups.
Note: The group (or groups) is deleted from any contact information in which
it appears. The contact’s in the group are not deleted. The group name
no longer appears as a Contacts List display option.
To add a contact to a group, just Edit a contact’s Group field. For
more information, refer to “Updating Contacts” on page 55.
Removing Group Members
To remove contacts from a group:
1.
(Apps) ➔
2.
Tap the Groups tab from the top of the page.
3.
Tap the
Label tab displayed above the Contacts List to
display the possible Groups.
4.
Tap the group from which you want to remove members.
5.
Tap
(Menu) ➔ Edit group members.
Tap
(Remove) for each contact you want to remove.
6.
The group name is removed from the contact’s Group field
and the contact is removed from the group.
7.
62
From a Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
Tap Done to delete the group members.
Favorites
Accessing Favorites
Mark contact records with an
favorites.
orange star to identify them as
1.
You can set your contacts display options to display only your
favorites (Starred in Android) for fast viewing or messaging.
Adding Favorites
To add a contact the Starred in Android list:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
2.
3.
Tap a contact to display it.
Tap
orange
To view your favorites list:
(Star) next to the contact name so that it turns
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
2.
Tap Favorites above the Contacts List.
Removing Favorites
To remove a contact from your favorites list:
1.
Tap a contact in the Favorites list to display it.
2.
Tap
(Star) next to the contact’s name so that it turns
gray
to remove it from this list.
.
Tip: You do not have to edit the contact to change the Starred status.
Contacts and Accounts
63
Synchronizing Contacts
5.
Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and
manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote
accounts to your device. Prior to syncing, you must first have an
active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current
Contact entries, and be signed into your account via the device.
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email
addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your
device. For more information about syncing existing managed
accounts, see “Accounts and Sync” on page 185.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
2.
Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish
to synchronize.
3.
Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4.
To synchronize Contacts, tap Sync Contacts. A green
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes. If
after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated, repeat step 2-3.
64
Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact
information.
6.
Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your
Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device.
Section 5: Messaging
This section describes how to send and receive messages and
other features associated with messaging.
Types of Messages
Your device supports these types of messages:
• Text Messages: Send and receive both SMS (text) and MMS
(multimedia) text messages
• Gmail: Send and receive Gmail from your Google account.
• Email: Send and receive email from your email accounts, including
Corporate Exchange mail.
• Google Talk: Chat with other Google Talk users.
Note: Wi-Fi-only devices do NOT support voice calling services. Please
disregard any “dial” and “message” related menus as some Gmail
options are identically set within most Android devices.
Message Icons on the Status Bar
Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display
when new messages are received. For more information, refer to
“Status Details” on page 22.
Creating and Sending Messages
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text
messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s message service.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio
messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s multimedia message service.
Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a
video clip to a text message changes the message from a text
message to a multimedia message.
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For more
information, refer to “Status Bar” on page 23.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Messaging) ➔
(Apps) ➔
(New message).
Note: Messages sent from your device to external email addresses are read
as [your number]@tmomail.net.
Messaging
65
2.
Tap the Enter recipient here field to manually enter a
recipient.
– or –
3.
Tap
(Add new contact) to select from one of the
following:
contact to place a checkmark then tap Done. The contact
displays in the recipient field.
Note: Delete any unnecessary members in the list by selecting the trash can
icon and deleting unwanted entries.
Tap the Enter message here field and use the on-screen
keypad/keyboard to enter a message. For more
information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 41.
6.
Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter recipient
here field or
7.
66
Message Options
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Messaging).
• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries
must have a wireless phone number or email address).
• Favorites: to select a recipient from the Favorites list.
• Groups: to select a recipient from the Group list.
4. If adding a recipient from the above categories, tap the
5.
Note: If you exit a message before you tap send the message automatically
saves as a draft.
and selecting recipients.
Review your message and tap Send .
2.
From within an open message, tap
(Menu) to display
additional messaging options:
• Preview: provides a preview of the MMS message content.
• Delete threads: erases the current message threads.
• Import text: allows you to add text items from sources such
as: Location, Contacts, Calendar, and Memo.
• Add slide: converts an SMS message into an MMS (Multimedia)
message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow.
– Once in an MMS message, tap
to choose from these options:
– Delete threads, Preview, Import text, Add slide, Remove slide, Add
subject, Font size, Remove subject, Duration, Slideshow layout, or
Settings.
• Add subject: adds a subject to the current message.
• Font size: adjust the font size of the current text strings. Choose
from: Smallest, Smaller, Medium, Larger, or Largest.
• Settings: adjust the Messaging application settings. For more
information, refer to “Messaging Settings” on page 70.
Viewing Newly Received Messages
When you receive a text message, your device notifies you by
displaying
within the Notification area at the bottom right
of your Home screen.
To read a message:
1.
Tap
to open the massaging application and select
the message. For more information, refer to “Status Bar”
on page 23.
Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into
message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see all the
messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and displays a
contact on the screen. Message threads are listed in the order in
which they were received, with the latest message displayed at
the top.
To reply to a text message:
1.
– or –
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Messaging).
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Messaging) then select the new message to view its
2.
While the message is open, tap the Enter message here
field and then type your reply message.
contents. The selected message displays on the screen.
2.
Tap
3.
In a single motion, touch and scroll up or down the page to
to play a multimedia message.
scroll through the message (if additional pages were
added).
Messaging
67
3.
Compose your reply. Your texts are colored Green and your
caller’s replies are Yellow.
Current Recipient
To access message thread options:
䊳
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold a
message from the Available Message list area to display
My Text
the following options:
• View Contacts: displays the Contact’s Overview page.
• Add to Contacts: begins the process of adding the new number to
your Contacts list.
• Delete thread: deletes the currently selected message thread.
To access additional Bubble options:
䊳
Touch and hold the message bubble to display the
following context menu options:
Reply Bubble
Available Message List
4.
Text Message Thread
Tap Send to review your reply.
– or –
Tap
to select one of the available message options
(page 66).
68
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message
bubble to an external recipient.
• Delete: deletes the currently selected message bubble from the
thread.
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble
from the thread.
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as a
single text message within the SIM card.
• Protection on/Protection off: locks or unlocks the currently
selected message bubble from being accidentally deleted.
• Details: displays details for the currently selected message bubble.
Deleting Messages
Deleting a message thread
1.
From a Home screen, tap
4.
Tap Delete.
5.
At the prompt, tap Delete to delete or Cancel to end the
(Apps) ➔
process.
(Messaging).
2.
Touch and hold a message from the Messages list, then
Message Search
select Delete thread.
3.
At the prompt, tap Delete to delete or Cancel to exit.
Deleting a single message
1.
From a Home screen, tap
Note: If prompted, select to also delete protected threads.
(Apps) ➔
You can search through your messages by using the Message
Search feature.
1.
(Messaging).
2.
Open a message to reveal the message string.
3.
Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete.
4.
At the prompt, tap Delete to delete or Cancel to exit.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
2.
Tap
3.
Use the on-screen keypad/keyboard to enter a word or
(Search).
phrase in which to search, then tap
4.
Deleting multiple messages
From a Home screen, tap
(Messaging).
.
All messages that contain the entered search string
display.
(Apps) ➔
(Messaging).
➔ Delete threads.
2.
Tap
3.
Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark
displays beside each selected message.
Messaging
69
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Messaging).
2.
Tap
➔ Settings.
The following Messaging settings are available:
Storage settings
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than overwriting them.
• Maximum number of text messages: allows you to set a limit on
how many text messages are allowed in one conversation.
• Limit for multimedia messages: allows you to set a limit on how
many multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.
Text message (SMS) settings
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs
you whether or not your message was delivered.
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the
messages stored on the SIM card.
• Message centre: allows you to enter the number of your message
center where your messages reside while the system is attempting
to deliver them.
70
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose from: GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic.
• Reply path: allows you to set the reply path for each message you
send messages.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs
you whether or not your message was delivered.
• Read reports: when this option is activated, your device receives a
request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient.
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve
messages.
• Roaming auto-retrieve: allows the message system to
automatically retrieve while roaming.
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode: Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
– Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content
belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
– Warning: the device will warn you via pop up messages that you are
creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content
Domain.
– Free: you may add any content to the message.
Push message settings
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from the
network.
• Service loading: allows you to set the type of service loading
notification. Choose from: Always, Prompt, or Never.
Notification settings
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your
status bar.
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message
notifications.
• Read out new message notification: allows you to enable/disable
the device to read out new message notifications.
• Read out message contents: allows you to enable/disable the
device to read out new message contents.
Note: Messages sent from your device to external email addresses are read
as [your number]@tmomail.net.
Gmail
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based email.
Tip: To set up your Google account on your device use Accounts and sync
settings. For more information, refer to “Accounts and Sync” on
page 185.
From a Home screen, tap
The first time you launch Gmail, your device prompts you to set
up your Google account.
Note: You can use more than one Google account on your device. To add
another account, use
(Menu)➔ Settings ➔ Add account option.
1.
Text-to-speech settings
䊳
Setting Up Your Gmail Account
(Apps) ➔
(Gmail).
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gmail).
At the Sign in with your Google Account screen:
• If you do not have a Google account, tap Create account and follow
the prompts to create a new account.
• If you do have a Google account, use the on-screen keypad to enter
your Google Email name and Password, then tap Sign in.
3. The device communicates with the Google server to set up
your account and synchronize your email. When complete,
your Gmail appears in the Inbox.
2.
Refreshing Your Gmail Account
Refresh your account to update your device from the Gmail
servers.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gmail).
(Refresh) in the Application Bar.
Messaging
71
Managing Your Gmail Account
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
•
(Apps) ➔
(Gmail).
•
(Menu) for these options:
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to “Gmail
Account Settings” on page 72.
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.
• Feedback?: Fill out a Google feedback form.
Composing and Sending Gmail
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Gmail).
2.
Tap
3.
Tap the To field to enter recipients. As you enter names or
(Compose).
email addresses, matching contacts display. Select a
contact to add it to the field.
4.
Tap the Subject field to enter a subject.
5.
Tap Compose Mail to enter the text of your email.
6.
While composing a message, the following options are
displayed:
• Save Draft: Save the message as a draft for sending later.
• + Cc/Bcc: Create Cc (copy) and Bcc (blind copy) fields in the
message. After creating the fields, touch to enter recipients.
72
Attach: Launch Gallery to select a photo to add to the
message.
7.
Discard: Close the message without saving.
Tap Send to send the email.
Gmail Account Settings
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gmail).
(Menu) ➔ Settings for settings:
General preferences
• Confirm before deleting: Have your device prompt you to confirm
Delete actions.
• Confirm before archiving: Have your device prompt you to confirm
archiving actions.
• Confirm before sending: Have your device prompt you to confirm
Send actions.
• Auto-advance: Choose a screen to show after you delete or
archive a conversation.
• Message text size: Set the size of text in message displays.
• Clear search history: Remove previous searches you performed.
• Restore default for “Show pictures”: Restores the default setting
(do not show pictures automatically) for all the people who send you
email, including those whose Show pictures setting you may have
changed when reading messages from them.
(Gmail account settings)
Sync options
– Gmail sync for this account is ON/OFF: Indicates whether you have
Gmail synchronization turned on for this account in the Account and
sync settings. Tap to open those settings.
– Labels to Sync: Choose which labels are synchronized.
– Auto-download attachments: Download files attached to recent
messages when connected through Wi-Fi.
Notifications
– Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email appear
in the Status Bar.
– Ringtone: Choose a ringtone for new email notifications.
– Vibrate: Choose vibration settings for email notifications.
– Notify once: When enabled, a notification appears in the Status Bar for
new email, not for every new message.
Signature
– Signature: Create a text signature to add to outgoing messages.
About Gmial
– About Gmail: Provides information about the Gmail and Google
services.
Email
Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email
using several email services. You can also receive text message
alerts when you receive an important email. Your device’s Email
application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts
simultaneously in one convenient location.
There are currently three main types of email accounts on your
device: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and
Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook®).
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to
access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private
Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account.
• IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently
used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current
standard.
• POP3 (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs
(Internet service providers) and common among consumer
applications. POP3 is the current standard.
• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync - This protocol is frequently used
with a large corporate email server system and provides access to
email, contact, and calendar synchronization.
Messaging
73
Creating an Internet Email Account
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Email).
2.
At the Set up email screen, enter an Email address and
Password, then tap Next.
3.
If you are asked What type of account?, tap the type of
account: POP3 account, IMAP account, or Microsoft
Exchange Active sync.
– or –
Review the Account options screen and make your
selections. Available options vary, depending on the
provider:
• Peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent to this
account during peak times. Options are: Push (Automatic), Manual,
every 5 or 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12 hours.
• Off-peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent to
this account during off-peak times. Options are: Push (Automatic),
Manual, every 5 or 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12 hours.
• Period to sync Email: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, set
whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1 or 2 weeks, or 1 month of email
on the tablet.
• Email check frequency: Set how often to check for new email.
Options are: Never, Every 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or
30 minutes, Every hour, Every 4 hours, or Once a day.
74
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size.
Options are: Headers only, 0.5KB, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or100 KB,
or All.
• Period to sync Calendar: Set how much of the calendar for this
account to sync with your tablet. Options are: 2 weeks, 1, 3, or 6
months, or All calendar.
• Send email from this account by default: When enabled, email
from your device is automatically sent from this account.
• Notify me when email arrives: When enabled, you receive
notifications when you receive new email sent to this account.
• Sync contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account are
synchronized with your device’s Contacts.
• Sync calendar: When enabled, events from your account are
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.
• Sync email from this account: For accounts that can sync
different kinds of information, check to sync email between your
tablet and the email service.
• Automatically download attachments when connected to
Wi-Fi: When enabled, attachments to messages are downloaded
when you receive them, rather than requiring you to explicitly
download the attachments when you open the messages.
Automatic downloads only occur when you are connected to a
Wi-Fi network.
4. Tap Next to go to the next screen or tap Previous to go to
the Apps screen.
5.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
screen name to identify yourself on this account.
2.
If you already have other email account setup:
• The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from
other email accounts accessed by your device.
6. Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You
can also view Personal information for this account,
Receipts (if you setup the account to return receipts),
Travel information, and more (if available).
7.
(Apps) ➔
At the Set up email screen, name the account and enter a
• Tap the account name field (upper-right) to open the
complete email account list page.
3.
Tap
(Menu) ➔ Settings ➔ Add account.
– or –
Enter your Email address and Password information.
Tap Show password to view the password string as you
Tap Done to store the new account.
enter it.
The device communicates with the appropriate server to
set up your account and synchronize your email. When
complete, your email appears in the Inbox for the account.
Note: To configure email account settings at any time, tap
Settings.
(Email).
(Menu) ➔
Creating a Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)
Your device also provides access to your company’s Outlook
Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email
application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and
Calendar information directly with your company’s Exchange
server.
• Email address: your Outlook work email address.
• Password: typically your network access password
(case-sensitive).
4. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new
email account screen). Consult your Network or IT
Administrator for further details and support. For more
information, refer to “Email Account Settings” on page 78.
Messaging
75
5.
From the Exchange server settings screen, enter an
• If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Use secure
connection (SSL) field to place a check mark in the box and
activate this additional level. Most often, this option should be
enabled.
• If your network requires you accept SSL certificates, tap the Accept
all SSL certificates field to place a check mark in the box and
activate this additional level. Most often, this option is not required.
Confirm this information with your IT Administrator.
updated Domain, and confirm your User name and
Password information.
• If your network requires you accept SSL certificates, tap the Accept
all SSL certificates field to place a check mark in the box and
activate this additional level. Most often, this option is not required.
Confirm this information with your IT Administrator.
Important!: If your exchange server requires this feature, leaving this field
unchecked can prevent connection.
Important!: If your exchange server requires this feature, leaving this field
unchecked can prevent connection.
With the new server information entered, tap Next ➔ OK.
6.
Tap Next.
7.
If your connection fails, you can be prompted to manually
For more information, refer to “Email Account Settings” on
update or re-enter your Exchange server information within
page 78.
the appropriate field. This field can often be populated with
incorrect or out of date information.
8.
9.
If prompted to accept additional remote security features,
tap OK.
10. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap
Important!: Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on
returned information.
• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address.
Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from
your company network administrator.
76
Next.
Note: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, the Activate device administrator?
screen may appear. Read the information and tap Activate to continue.
11. Identify your new work email account with a unique name
3.
(Ex: Work), then tap Done. The device communicates with
Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.
• If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate
the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message
recipients as you want.
the appropriate server to set up your account and
synchronize your email. When complete, your email
– or –
appears in the Inbox for the account.
Tap
Note: To configure email account settings at any time, tap
Settings.
(Menu) ➔
Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
5.
Tap +Me to add yourself as a recipient.
Adding Additional Email Accounts
– or –
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
3.
Enter the Email address, Password, and so on.
(Email).
(Menu) ➔ Settings ➔ Add account.
Composing and Sending Email
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap an account, if you have more than one account set up,
then tap
to add a contact to the field.
4.
(Email).
Tap +Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients.
• Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.
• Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.
6. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
7.
While composing a message, the following options are
displayed:
•
(Compose).
Priority: Set the email priority. Options are: High, Normal, or
Low.
•
Security options: Set the email security options. Options are:
Encrypt and Sign.
Messaging
77
•
Attach: Choose an attachment to add to the message from
the listed apps, such as Drawing Pad, My Files, Picture, Audio,
Video, and so on.
– To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the screen)
and make a category selection.
– Tap the file you wish to attach.
– Tap
to delete the attached file.
Note: If you attach an image to your email, you have the option to resize it
prior to delivery. Choose from: Original, Large (70%), Medium (30%),
or Small (10%). Once chosen, tap OK.
•
Insert: Choose an item to insert into the message from the
listed apps, such as Drawing pad, Picture, Contacts, and so on.
Note: Some of the above options may not display depending on the email
account.
8.
78
From a Home screen, tap
Note: Available settings may depend on the email account and include
setting how much email to synchronize, creating signatures for email
you send, and other handling options.
1.
Once complete, tap Send.
Managing Email
You can view email you receive to all accounts in the Combined
view screen or you can view email accounts individually.
1.
Tap the pop-up menu
at the top left of the
screen to select:
• Combined view: View
all email in a combined
inbox.
• <Account Name>:
View email for the
account.
Email Account Settings
Account settings lets you configure handling of email on your
device.
2.
(Apps) ➔
(Email).
2.
From a Home screen, tap
Tap
(Apps) ➔
(Email).
(Menu) ➔ Settings, then tap Email Preferences.
The following options display:
Application Preferences
• Message text size: Set a font size to be used for your emails.
Options are: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, and Huge.
• Message preview line: Choose a message preview line amount.
Options are: None or 1, 2, or 3 lines.
Note: The following settings can very depending on the selected email
account type.
3.
Tap an email account to display the following settings:
General settings
• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display
name.
• Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your
outgoing email messages.
• Signature: The signature to text used in the footer of outgoing
emails from this account.
• Email check frequency: adjusts the time interval used by your
device to check your email account for new email messages.
• Default account: When enabled, email from your device is
automatically sent from this account.
• Always Cc/Bcc myself: Lets you manage whether your email
address is included in the Cc or Bcc lines.
Exchange ActiveSync settings
• Period to sync Email: Set whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1 or 2
weeks, or 1 month of email on the tablet.
• Empty server trash: If available, indicates whether to delete the
contents in the server trash.
• Sync schedule: Set up your peak and off-peak schedule controls,
which determines when your tablet checks the email service for
new email.
• Out of office settings: Lets you set how email is handled for a
defined period of time, while you are unable to check your email.
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size,
which ranges from 0.5 KB to 100 KB or allow All email to be
retrieved.
• Period to sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account
are synchronized with your device’s Calendar.
• Security options: Set various security options for the account.
• In case of Sync Conflict: Set whether to update the server or your
tablet if there is a conflict of information between them.
Notification settings
• Email notifications: When enabled, the New Email icon appears in
the Status Bar when a new email arrives.
• Select ringtone: Choose a ringtone for email notifications for this
account.
• Vibrate: When enabled, email notifications for this accounts are
accompanied by vibration.
Server settings
• Incoming settings: Configure incoming server settings. For more
information, refer to “Email Account Settings” on page 78.
• Outgoing settings: Configure outgoing server settings. For more
information, refer to “Email Account Settings” on page 78.
• Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account are
synchronized with your device’s Contacts.
Messaging
79
• Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.
Common settings
• Forward with files: When enabled, forwarded emails are sent to
recipients along with the original file attachments.
Google Talk
Talk is Google’s instant messaging and audio and video chat
service. You can use it to communicate, in real time, with other
people who also use Google Talk on another Android tablet or
phone or on a computer.
Tip: Talk requires that you have a Google account. To set up your Google
account on your device use Accounts and sync settings. For more
information, refer to “Accounts and Sync” on page 185.
Open Talk and Sign In
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Talk).
If you are not signed in to a Google account, the Sign in
with your Google Account screen displays.
2.
Tap Create account to create a new Google account.
– or –
Enter your Email address and Password and tap Sign in, if
you have an existing Google account.
80
Note: If you have already set up your Google account, you are automatically
logged in. Just tap Sign in.
3.
After entering your user name and password, tap Sign in.
Once sign in is complete, the Talk main screen displays.
Invite a Friend to Chat
You can invite anyone with a Google Account to become your
friend in Google Talk, so you can chat with each other and view
each other’s online status.
1.
While viewing your Friends list, tap
2.
Enter your friend’s address and tap Send invitation.
(Add friend).
Your friend’s address in Talk is a Gmail or other email
address that is configured to connect to Google Talk.
If your friend accepts your invitation, they are added to
your Friends list in Talk and you can share each others
status in Talk and other applications.
View and Accept an Invitation to Become a Friend
– View in Contacts: View the friend’s Contact information.
– Nickname: Create a nickname for the friend.
– Show in Friends list: Set how to show this friend in you Friends list.
Options are: Always, Never, or Automatically. Automatically determines
whether your friend is popular with you.
When a contact invites you to become a friend in Google Talk,
you receive a notification in the System bar
and the
invitation appears in your Friends list.
1.
Tap the invitation.
2.
Tap Accept, if you want to accept the invitation and chat,
• Block friend: Block a friend from sending you messages and
remove the friend from your Friends list.
• Remove friend: Remove the friend as if you never accepted their
invitation. However, the friend is not blocked.
Decline, if you do not want to chat with and share your
Google Talk status with the sender right now, or Block, if
you do not want to receive any more invitations from that
person.
If you tap Accept, the friend is added to your Friends list in
Talk and you can share your status in Talk and other
applications.
Options While Chatting
There are several options that are available while you are
chatting.
䊳
Tap
Note: If you touch the Remove friend option, tap
Add friend ➔ Send chat
invitation to, to make the Friend visible again.
• Add to chat: Select another friend to join in the current chat.
• Clear chat history: Remove the history of this chat from your
device.
Additional Talk Options
1.
to search your
Talk messages. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a
search term. Tap
(Chat Menu) to the right of the chat window. The
on the keypad to search your Talk
messages.
following options display:
• Go off the record/Stop chatting off the record: Set whether you
want to stop saving your chat to the chat history.
• Friend info: Display information about the friend with which you are
chatting.
While viewing your Friends list, tap
2.
Tap
(Menu) to display the following options:
• All friends / Most popular: List all friends or the most popular
friends.
Messaging
81
• Close all chats: Terminates any chats that you have open.
• Sign out: Sign out of Google Talk and display the Talk main screen.
• Settings: Offers various settings for Google talk. For more
information, refer to “Google Talk Settings” on page 82.
• Help: Displays additional help information.
3. Tap a Friend’s entry to display the Chat entries for that
Friend.
Google Talk Settings
Use Google Talk Settings to configure your Talk account. If you
have more than one account, each maintains its own Talk
settings.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
(Apps) ➔
(Talk).
(Menu) ➔ Settings, then touch an account for
options:
• General settings:
– Sign in automatically: Enable or disable automatic sign in to Google
Talk when you power on your tablet.
– Mobile indicator: Check and your friends see an outline of an android
next to your name in their Friends list when you are signed into Google
Talk on a tablet or phone.
– Set status to away when the screen is turned off: Check to
change your Talk status to Away when your screen turns off. When
unchecked, your status is not changed.
82
• Chat notifications
– IM notifications: Set whether to open a dialog, display a notification in
the System bar, or neither, when you receive a text chat.
– Notification ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when you
receive a text chat.
– Vibrate: Set how vibrate functions. Choices are: Always, Only when
silent, or Never.
– Invitation notifications: Enable or disable a notification in the System
bar when you receive an invitation to become a friend in Talk.
• Voice & video chat settings
– Video chat notifications: Set whether to open a dialog or display a
notification in the System bar when you are invited to a video chat.
– Video chat ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when you
receive an invitation to a video chat.
– Vibrate: Set how vibrate functions. Choices are: Always, Only when
silent, or Never.
• Account
– Blocked friends: Displays a list of friends you have blocked. Touch a
blocked friend and then tap OK to unblock the friend.
– Clear search history: Erases your search history. No previous
searches are shown until you search for new words.
– Manage account: Opens the Accounts and sync settings. For more
information, refer to “Accounts and Sync” on page 185.
• About
– Terms & privacy: Displays the Google Talk terms of use and privacy
policies.
Section 6: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your
device, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, and how
to manage your photos, images and sounds.
The Camera screen displays.
GPS Active
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in
camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG
format.
Mode
Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with
another person’s privacy.
Camera
Using the Camera
Image
Viewer
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows
may appear on the photo.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
Taking Photos
(Camera).
– or –
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Options
(Camera).
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the
camera key.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Camera).
Multimedia
83
2.
Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your photo by
aiming the lens at the subject. To configure settings, see
“Camera Options” on page 84.
3.
If desired, before taking the photo, use the left area of the
screen to access various camera options and settings.
4.
You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired
area of interest.
5.
To take the photo, tap
(Camera key) until the shutter
sounds. (The picture is automatically stored within your
6.
Camera Options
Before you start taking photos, use the camera options to
configure the camera for best results. Camera options are
represented by icons on the left side of the screen. While in
Camera mode, touch the following icons to set camera options:
Flash: Choose a flash mode from Auto flash, On, or Off,
which is the default.
Self shot: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera lens
and take a photo of yourself.
designated storage location.
Shooting mode: Choose an automatic shooting mode,
from:
Tap
• Single shot: Take a single photo.
(Back) to leave the Camera and display the
previous screen.
Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with
another person’s privacy.
• Smile shot: Touch the Camera button to
automatically focus on the subject’s face and take
the photo.
• Panorama: Touch the Camera button to take a photo,
then use the on-screen guideline to move the
viewfinder and take the next 7 shots automatically.
• Action shot: Detects action and creates a panorama
of the moving object.
Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before taking a
photo. Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.
84
Exposure value: Set the brightness of the photo.
Settings:
• Focus mode: Set the focus mode to Auto focus or
Macro.
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in
various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for
Camcorder.
• Scene mode: Choose an automatic scene mode from
None, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor,
Sunset, Dawn, Text, or Candlelight.
• White balance: Set the light source. Options are:
Auto, Daylight, Incandescent, Fluorescent, or Cloudy.
• Effects: Apply an effect to photos. Options are: None,
Black and White, Sepia, or Negative.
Camera button: takes a photo when tapped in Camera
mode.
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and
the various viewing options for a selected picture. The last
picture you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail in
the Image viewer icon.
• Resolution: Set a size for the image. Options
are: 3.2M (2048x1536) or 0.8M (1024x768).
• Metering: Set how the camera measures or meters
the light source: Matrix, Center-weighted, or Spot.
• GPS tag: Enable or disable tagging of photos with
your GPS location.
displays on the screen
when this option is active.
Caution!: Be aware that your location may be present on a
photo when posting your photos on the internet.
Multimedia
85
Viewing Photos with the Image Viewer
After taking a photo, use the Image Viewer to view, share, delete,
or edit photos.
1.
Tap Image Viewer to view the photo.
2.
Tap the screen to show or hide Image Viewer options.
3.
With the image active, tap the screen with two fingers or
double-tap on the screen to zoom all the way in or out. For
more information, refer to “Pinch” on page 21.
4.
Sweep across the screen to display the next or previous
photo. The current photo is outlined in the thumbnails at
the bottom of the screen. Touch a thumbnail to view the
photo it represents.
5.
Tap
(Slideshow) to view a slideshow of your photos.
Tap the screen to stop the slideshow and view the photo
being displayed.
6.
Tap
(Share) to use Social Hub, Messaging, Picasa,
Dropbox, Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email to share the photo.
7.
Tap
(Delete) to delete the photo being displayed. Tap
Confirm Delete to delete the photo or Cancel to exit.
86
8.
Tap
(Menu) to display the following options:
• Details: Provides details about the photo such as Title, Time,
Location, Width, Height, File Size, and so on. Tap the X to close the
pop-up.
Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as jpg files.
• Show on map: This option displays if a Location exists for the
photo. A Location is added to the photo if GPS tag is set On in the
Camera settings. Tap this option to open the Map app and display
the Location where the photo was taken. For more information,
refer to “Camera Options” on page 84.
Caution!: Be aware that your location may be present on a photo when
posting your photos on the internet.
• Rotate Left: Allows you to rotate the picture counterclockwise 90
degrees.
• Rotate Right: Allows you to rotate the picture clockwise 90
degrees.
• Set picture as: Assign the photo as a Contact photo, Lock Screen,
or Wallpaper.
• Crop: Allows you to crop the image. Tap and drag the crop box or
the sides or corners of the crop box to create the crop area, then
tap Ok. Tap X to stop without cropping the picture.
• Print: Print the current photo to a compatible Samsung printer.
• Copy: Copy the current photo to the clipboard.
• Motion: Display Motion activation settings.
9. Tap
(Back) to return to the Camera to take more
• Wallpaper assigns the current image to the home screen
background. This image is spread across all available screens.
5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture.
Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out
photos.
to create a cropped area.
Assigning an Image as a Contact Icon
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3.
With the image displayed, tap
(Gallery).
Tap X to stop without updating the wallpaper image.
as ➔ Contact photo.
Tap a contact to make a selection.
5.
Crop the image and tap OK.
Editing a Photo
You can edit your photos using the Photo editor application on
your device.
For more information, refer to “Photo Editor” on page 96.
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper
Using the Camcorder
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3.
With the image displayed, tap
(Gallery).
and then tap Set picture
as.
4.
Tap OK to assign the wallpaper image.
– or –
and then tap Set picture
4.
6.
Select one of the two options:
• Lock screen assigns the selected image to the background for the
lock screen.
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send high
definition videos. Use your device’s built-in Camcorder to record
high-definition video in 720p resolution.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Slide
(Mode button) to the
(Camera).
(Camcorder) setting.
The Camcorder screen displays.
Multimedia
87
6.
Mode
7.
Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer, then
tap
to play your video for review.
Tap
(Back) to leave the Camcorder and display the
previous screen.
Record
Image
Viewer
Options
Recording Videos
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Slide
(Camera).
3.
Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your shot by
(Mode button) to the
(Camcorder) setting.
aiming the lens at the subject. To configure settings, see
“Camcorder Options” on page 88
4.
To start recording, tap
(Record). During recording, the
Record button flashes.
5.
88
Tap
(Record) to stop recording.
Important!: Do not take videos of people without their permission.
Do not take videos in places where cameras are not allowed.
Do not take videos in places where you may interfere with
another person’s privacy.
Camcorder Options
Before you start recording videos, use the camcorder options to
configure the camcorder for best results. Camcorder options are
represented by icons on the left side of the screen. While in
Camcorder mode, touch the following icons to set camcorder
options:
Flash: Touch Off or On.
Self shot: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera lens
and record a video of yourself.
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode to:
Normal, which is limited only by available space on the
destination location, Limit for MMS, which is limited by
MMS size restrictions, and Self recording which activates
the front-facing camera so you can video yourself.
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in
various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for
Camcorder.
Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before recording a
video. Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.
Camcorder button: shoots or stops video recording
when tapped in Camcorder mode.
Exposure value: Set the brightness of the video.
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer
and the various viewing options for a selected picture.
The last video you shot, will be displayed as a thumbnail
in the Image viewer icon.
Settings
• White balance: allows you to set this option to one of
the following choices: Auto, Daylight, Incandescent,
Fluorescent, or Cloudy.
• Effects: Apply an effect to videos. Options are: None,
Black and White, Sepia, or Negative.
• Resolution: Set a size for the video. Options
are: 1280x720 or 640x480.
Viewing Videos with the Image Viewer
After recording a video, use the Image Viewer to play, share, or
delete your video.
1.
Tap Image Viewer to view the video.
2.
Tap the screen to show or hide Image Viewer options.
Multimedia
89
3.
4.
5.
Sweep across the screen to display the next or previous
white dot on the progress bar
the bottom of the screen. Tap a thumbnail to view the
progress bar to restart the video. Tap the right end of the
video it represents.
progress bar to end the video playback.
Tap
– or –
(Slideshow) to view a slideshow of your video
thumbnails. Touch the screen to stop the slideshow and
Tap
view the video being displayed.
to end the video.
Tap
(Share) to use Messaging, YouTube, Dropbox,
Tap
(Delete) to delete the video being displayed. Tap
Confirm Delete to delete the photo or Cancel to exit.
7.
Touch and drag the
to fast forward or rewind the video. Tap the left end of the
Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email to share the video.
6.
9.
video. The current video is outlined in the thumbnails at
Tap
(Menu) to display the following options:
• Details: Provides details about the photo such as Title, Time,
Duration, File Size, and so on. Tap the X to close the pop-up.
Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as mp4 files.
(Rewind) to restart the video or
10. Press
(Fast Forward)
(Back) to return to the Camcorder.
Video Player
Your device’s large LCD screen provides playback of videos. Use
Video to view and manage videos stored on your tablet. This
device is able to playback DivX videos.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Video
player).
2.
Tap the Thumbnails, List, or Folders tab to select a display
method for the available videos.
8.
To play a video, tap
the video and tap
video.
90
(Play). Tap
(Pause) to pause
(Resume) to resume playing the
3.
While viewing the list, tap
(Menu) for options:
• List by: Display videos by Name (default), Date, Size, or Type.
• Share via: Share the video with YouTube, Dropbox, Bluetooth,
Messaging, Gmail, or Email.
• Delete: Tap videos to select them for deletion or tap Select all to
delete all videos. Tap Delete to deleted the selected videos.
• Auto play next: Tap to enable or disable automatic playing of
videos in the order they appear.
4. Tap a video to play it. While playing a video, touch the
screen to display or hide on-screen playback controls.
Tap the upper-left of the playback screen while the video is
playing to change the Display Mode from original size to full
screen in ratio or full screen.
• Original Size (
): Changes the display mode to the original size.
• Full-Screen in Ratio View (
): Changes the display mode to
the full-screen in ratio option. The video is enlarged as much as
possible without becoming distorted.
• Full-Screen View (
): Changes the display mode to full screen.
That is, the entire screen is used, which may cause some minor
distortion.
6. While the video is playing, tap the screen and select
(Bookmark) to mark your favorite areas of the video. A
yellow mark appears on the progress bar.
5.
7.
During playback, tap the screen and select
(Menu) for
options:
• Share via: Send the video by Messaging, YouTube, Dropbox,
Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email.
• Bookmarks: If bookmarks have been set for this video, a thumbnail
and time are displayed for each bookmark.
– Tap
to remove a bookmark.
• Color tone: Set the color tone to Normal, Warm, or Cold.
• Outdoor visibility: Turn outdoor visibility On or Off.
• Details: Provides details about the video, such as Name, Size,
Resolution, Duration, Format, and Date modified.
For more information, refer to “Playing Videos within the Gallery”
on page 95.
DivX Overview
This device is able to playback DivX videos. DivX Certified to play
DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. If you try
to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the
message “Authorization Error” will be displayed and your content
will not play.] Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.
Your device must first be registered to playback protected or
purchased DivX content. DRM-free or unprotected content does
not required DivX VOD registration.
Multimedia
91
Locating Your VOD Registration Number
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
3.
➔ About device ➔ Legal Information ➔ License settings ➔
and from within the
DivX® VOD > Register.
VOD menu, select
2.
Write down your Registration code.
Register a DivX
3.
Tap OK.
Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of Purchased
Movies
To play purchased DivX movies on your device, you will first need
to complete a one-time registration using both your device and
your computer.
1.
Write down the DivX registration code that appears
onscreen. Copy this 8 or 10-digit number down.
2.
Verify you have the latest DivX software running on your
computer. Download the free player (for your computer)
from www.divx.com.
92
Open the DivX Player
on your computer
(Settings)
Certified Device...
4.
You are prompted to
log in or create a
DivX account if your
account information has not already been saved in DivX
Player.
5.
Follow the
now and select the location of the internal storage or USB
(the device) as the target destination for the registration
registration code
video (created in step 6) and click Start.
from step 2 and
– or –
create a device
Locate the created file, copy and paste it into the new drive
nickname (ex: “Pat or
letter corresponding to your device’s storage location.
Select a location on
your computer to
download the DivX
registration video
with the same title as
your device nickname (ex: Pat.divx).
7.
Follow the on-screen instructions to download the file and
initiate the transfer process. You will need to place this
video file onto your device and play it back.
8.
From the Registration screen (Transfer), click Transfer Video
Player to enter the
Pat’s Device”).
6.
9.
instructions in DivX
Connect your device to the computer via USB and transfer
10. From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Files.
11. Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file to
play it. Once you play the registration file on your device,
your registration is complete.
12. Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen (from within your
computer’s DivX Player) and confirm both your computer
and your new device appears in the list of registered DivX
devices.
Important!: There is no special registration or configuration necessary to
playback DRM-free DivX movies. Registration of your device is
only required for playback of protected DivX material.
this video.
Multimedia
93
Gallery
5.
Your large LCD screen provides high-resolution display of photos and
videos. Use the Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and
videos.
Selecting Photos and Videos to View
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gallery).
All categories are displayed.
2.
Tap By album to
display other ways to
• By album: Based on
the folder in which they
are stored.
• By time: Based on the
time taken.
• By location: Based on where taken.
• By tags: Based on tags applied.
• By size: Based on size.
3. Tap Images and videos to set whether to display Images
and videos, Images only, or Videos only.
4.
94
Tap
(Camera) to launch the Camera app.
(Information) and touch an Album to display
information about it.
6.
Tap
(Menu) to display the Make available offline
option.
Viewing Categories of Photos and Videos
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a category to view its contents.
3.
Tap
(Gallery).
(Information) and touch a photo or video to display
information about it. Tap X in the pop-up to close it.
group your photos and
videos. Options are:
Tap
4.
Depending on the way you chose the category, you can
view it By Album, By time, By location, By tags, or By size.
You can also change the category to view Images and
videos, Images only, or Videos only.
5.
Tap
(Slideshow) to view a slideshow of the photos
and video thumbnails in the category. Touch the screen to
stop the slideshow and view the photo or video being
displayed.
Viewing Photos and Videos with Gallery
(Apps) ➔
8.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a category to view it and then touch a photo or video
(Share) to share images (Social Hub, Messaging,
(Messaging, YouTube, Dropbox, Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email).
9.
thumbnail.
Tap
Picasa, Dropbox, Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email) and videos
(Gallery).
Tap
(Delete) to delete the photo or video being
displayed. Tap Confirm Delete to delete the photo or video
3.
Tap the screen to show or hide Gallery options.
4.
Tap an image or video to open it.
5.
Tap the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the
or Cancel to exit.
Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as mp4 files.
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more information,
10. Tap
refer to “Pinch” on page 21.
6.
Sweep across the screen to display the next or previous
photo or video. (Videos are indicated by the
(Play)
button over the icon.) The current photo or video is outlined
(Back) to return to the category screen.
Playing Videos within the Gallery
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a category to view it and then touch a video thumbnail
(Gallery).
to play the video.
in the thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Tap a
thumbnail to view the photo or video it represents.
7.
Tap
(Slideshow) to view a slideshow of photos and
video thumbnails in the category. Tap the screen to stop
the slideshow and view the photo or video being displayed.
Note: Videos are marked with a
3.
Tap
Play button.
(Pause) to pause the video and tap
(Resume)
to resume playing the video.
Multimedia
95
4.
Touch and drag the
white dot on the progress bar
to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left end of
the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the right end of
the progress bar to end the video playback.
– or –
Tap
(Rewind) to restart the video or
(Fast Forward)
Photo Editor
The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions for
photos that you take on your device. Along with basic image
tuning like brightness, contrast, and color, it also provides a wide
variety of effects used for editing the photo.
1.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
(Gallery).
2.
Tap a category to display thumbnails, then select items for
sharing:
• To select an entire category, touch and hold a photo or video
thumbnail, then tap Select All ➔
Share. Tap Deselect All to
un-highlight photos and videos.
• To select multiple photos or videos from a category, touch and hold
a photo or video thumbnail, tap thumbnails to highlight them for
sharing, then tap
Share.
3. Tap Social Hub (photos only), Messaging, Picasa (photos
only), Dropbox, YouTube (videos only), Bluetooth, Gmail, or
96
(Photo
Tap Select picture to edit a picture in your Gallery.
– or –
(Apps) ➔
1.
Email, then follow the prompts.
(Apps) ➔
editor).
to end the video.
Sharing Photos and Videos
From a Home screen, tap
Tap Take a picture to take a picture with the camera.
3.
Tap the picture and it is loaded into the Photo editor.
4.
Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your photo:
Selection: Allows you to set the size of the
selection tool.
Color: Set the Auto adjustment, Exposure,
Saturation, Contrast, Brightness, and Hue of a
photo. You can also make it Grey-scale or add a
Temperature effect.
• Tap the selection icon and then touch
Rectangle, Ellipse, Lasso, or Grab to set how
to mark an area for cropping, rotating, and so
on.
Effects: Add various effects to your photo, such
as Blur, Motion, Filter, or Frames.
Tools: Copy and Paste to another image or to
the original image. You can also Fill a selected
area.
• Tap
to select a single area,
to add
to a selected area, or
to remove part of a
selected area.
• Tap
to select the entire photo.
5.
Undo: Remove the last change.
When all updates to the photo have been made, tap
(Save). Use the keypad to name the edited photo and
tap OK to save it.
Redo: Restore a removed change.
Rotate: Rotate a photo to the left or to the right
or create a mirror image of the photo.
Resize: Touch and then drag the corners of the
photo to resize it.
Crop: Tap to crop (cut-out) an area of a photo.
6.
While editing a photo, tap
(Menu) to display the
following options:
• Select picture: Open a new photo for editing.
• Take a picture: Open the Camera and take a new photo.
• Share via: Tap Social Hub, Messaging, Picasa, Dropbox,
Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email to send memos to another device or
another person.
• Set as: Use this photo as a Contact photo, a Lock Screen, or
Wallpaper image.
Multimedia
97
Media Hub
3.
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and
TV content. With hundreds of titles available, entertaining your
family on the go was never easier. You can rent or purchase your
favorite content and watch from any location. Featuring the
stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media
Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you've never
experienced it before.
Note: Media Hub service requires a Media Hub account and depends on
service availability.
Important!: You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G connection to preview and
download a media file.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Media
Hub).
2.
Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and touch
Accept to continue or Decline to exit.
The Media Hub screen displays.
98
To rent or buy media, you must have a Media Hub account.
Tap
(Menu) ➔ My Account to log in to your account or
to create an account. Follow the prompts to complete
log-in.
4.
Browse content using these options:
• What’s new: Shows recently added media that is available for rent
or purchase.
• Movies: Displays movies that are available for rent or purchase.
Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the screen. Touch
a category and movies of that type display.
• TV Shows: Displays TV shows that are available for purchase.
Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the screen. Touch
a category and TV shows of that type display.
• My Media: Allows you to view all of the media that you have
purchased or rented. Touch a media entry to view it.
5. When you find media you want to view, use these options:
• Preview: View a short clip from the movie or show.
• Own: Purchase the media for unlimited viewing on your device.
Follow the prompts to enter payment details.
• Rent: Purchase a time-limited download of the media. Follow the
prompts to enter payment details.
Media Hub Notices
• Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you
create an account in Media Hub.
• Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up
to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same
account.
• You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than
once every 90 days.
• You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you’d
like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a
later point in time subject to content re-download availability and
studio permissions.
• You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have
acquired through the Service.
• You must have Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content.
• Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account.
• Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.
• Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
• You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media
Content has been buffered.
• You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive
hours of start of playback.
• Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
• In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of
more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after
the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing
rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction,
but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content
may not be available for the entire twenty-four (24) consecutive
hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond
the thirty (30) day rental window).
• You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub
through any output on your mobile device, including All Share.
T-Mobile TV
T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get both live
Standard and High definition TV and Video on Demand.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(T-Mobile TV). The T-Mobile Terms and Conditions
page displays.
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please
contact your service provider for further details.
Multimedia
99
2.
Read the on-screen description about the compatability
soom feature and tap OK.
3.
Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions.
– or –
Music App
The Music application contains a music player that plays music
and other audio files that you copy from your computer.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music).
The Music app searches both your online library and your
Tap Exit to close the application.
device’s internal storage for music and playlists; this can
take from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on
Note: T-Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be
used. During this initial registration process, any current Wi-Fi
connections must be disabled.
the amount of new music added since you last opened the
application. It then displays a carousel view of your new
4.
Tap Disable Wi-Fi if you currently have an active Wi-Fi
and recent music, organized by album.
connection.
5.
If prompted, tap Yes to acknowledge you have a
2.
your new and recent music.
WebConnect data plan or tap No.
6.
Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30-day trial of the service.
• If you already have an account, you can skip the trial and just log in.
7. Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing:
Home, Live TV, On Demand, Featured, More Info, Browse, or
Live Channels.
100
Swipe left or right to spin the carousel and browse through
3.
Tap an on-screen album to open it and begin playback.
4.
Return to the Library screen from most other screens in
the Music application by tapping the Music application
icon
at the top-left of the Application bar.
3.
Tap an option to set how you view your library. The choices
are: New and recent, Albums, Artists, Songs, Playlists, or
Genres.
Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid, list, or carousel,
depending on the view.
Searching for Music in Your Library
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
3.
Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.
Changing Library View
(Music).
(Search).
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search
box.
You can change the way you view the contents of your library.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Music).
2.
Tap the name of the current view, such as New and recent,
artist, or playlist to view a list of its songs, or tap
near the top-left of the Application bar.
to an item in the list to play it or add it to a playlist.
4.
Tap a matching song to play it, touch a matching album,
Multimedia
next
101
Changing Music Settings
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
Playing Music
(Apps) ➔
(Music).
(Menu). The following options display:
• Hide now playing bar / Show now playing bar: Hide or show the
Now Playing bar that appears at the bottom of the screen. You can
return to the Now playing screen from other Music screens by
touching the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar.
• Shuffle all: Play all songs in a random order.
• Hide labels / Show labels: Hide or show labels. This option is not
available in all library views.
• Help: Opens the Browser with information about the Music
application.
Listening to Music
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a song in your library to listen to it.
(Music).
– or –
While viewing a list of songs, tap
next to a song and
tap Play.
– or –
While viewing a list of albums, artists, playlists, or genres,
the label area
under an item and tap Play.
The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched
or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play. The
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in speakers,
through a wired headset, or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo
headset. For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on
page 115.
tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the
Press
(Volume Key) on the side of the device to
activate on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on the
scale to set volume. You can also press the Volume Key to adjust
playback volume.
you switch applications.
102
end of the list (unless you choose a repeat option).
Otherwise, playback stops only if you stop it, even when
Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music
application, the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen.
You can use this to control playback or tap
(Menu) ➔ Hide
now-playing bar.
Displaying the Now Playing Screen
If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to return to
the Now playing screen from other Music screens:
䊳
Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar.
– or –
Tap
(Music notification icon) in the System bar, and in
the Status Details opens, tap the song title. You can also
pause and resume playback and skip to the next or
previous song in the panel. For more information, refer to
“Notifications” on page 21.
Options While Playing a Song
When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays. There
are various options and controls available while a song is playing:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap an album or song.
3.
Tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music).
(Menu) to display the following options:
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing
playlist.
• More by artist: View any other music in your library by the artist
that performs this song.
• Help: Opens the Browser with information about the Music
application.
4. Tap the SONG title to add the song to a playlist.
5.
Tap the ARTIST name to view information about the artist
associated with this song.
6.
Tap ALBUM to list and play the songs on the album.
Multimedia
103
The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you can tap
to control the playback of songs, albums, and playlists:
When Shuffle mode is enabled, songs play in
random order. When disabled, songs play in the
order they appear in List view.
Tap to pause playback.
Tap to resume playback
Tap to advance to the next song. Touch and hold to
scan forward through the current song.
Tap to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold
to scan backward through the current song.
Tap to repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or
disable repeat mode.
Creating a Playlist
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Music).
2.
Tap an album or song list and play a song.
3.
Tap
4.
Tap the NAME field to enter a name for the playlist.
5.
Tap OK to save the new playlist.
(Menu) ➔ Add to playlist ➔ New playlist.
Adding Songs to Playlists
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap an album or song list and play a song.
3.
Tap
(Music).
(Menu) ➔ Add to playlist.
Playing a Playlist
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Display the Playlists library view.
3.
Tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music).
next to a playlist title and tap Play.
Deleting a Playlist
104
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Display the Playlists library view.
3.
Tap
(Apps) ➔
next to a playlist title and tap Delete.
(Music).
Music Player
Playing a Song
The Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from
your computer.
Viewing Your Music Library
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music
player).
2.
The Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from
your computer.
1.
1.
Tap a song or playlist to begin playback. The music player
displays to the right of the music listing.
3.
Tap the music player to enlarge it and touch the screen to
display the sound and playlist controls.
player).
Favorite
The Music Player application searches your device’s
Song Title
Volume
internal storage for music and playlists. This can take from
Artist / Album Info List Mode
5.1 Channel
Mode
a few seconds to several minutes, depending on the
amount of new music added since you last opened the
application. It then displays your music in several ways
2.
Tap Songs, Playlists, Albums, Artists, Genres, Folders,
Composers, or Years to change the way you view the
contents of your library.
3.
Tap the Music application icon
at the top-left of the
Application bar to return to the main Music screen from
most other screens in the Music application.
Progress
Bar
Shuffle
Playback Controls
Repeat
Time
Indicators
Multimedia
105
4.
During playback, use the sound and playlist controls:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
106
Favorite: Tap the star
to mark the current song as a favorite.
Info: Tap to view information about the current song.
List mode: Tap to switch to the list of songs.
Volume: Tap to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and
drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press the Volume Key
on the side of the device to adjust playback volume.
5.1 Channel Mode: Tap to enable stereo sound.
Progress Bar: Tap and drag the end of the progress bar to scan
forward or backward through the current song.
Shuffle: When enabled, songs play in random order. When
disabled, songs play in the order they appear in List view.
Playback controls: These buttons control the playback of songs:
– Tap
to advance to the next song. Touch and hold
to scan
forward through the current song.
– Tap
to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold
to scan
backward through the current song.
– Tap
to pause playback. Tap
to resume playback.
Repeat: Tap to repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or disable
repeat mode.
Time indicators: The time indicators show, in minutes and
seconds, how much of the song has played (left) and the length of
the song (right).
Options While Playing a Song
There are various options and controls available while a song is
playing:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music
player)..
2.
Tap an album or song.
3.
Tap
(Menu) to display the following options:
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing
playlist.
• Via Bluetooth: Play the current song by using a Bluetooth device.
• Share via: Share the current song by using Droppbox, Bluetooth,
Messaging, Gmail, or Email.
• Set as alarm tone: Use the current song and as an alarm tone.
• Settings: The following settings display:
– Sound settings: Choose Equalizer and Sound effects settings.
– Music menu: Enable or disable the music display options that appear
next to an option means
on the main music screen. A check mark
that it is enabled.
Managing Your Music
Renaming a Playlist
Searching for Music
1.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music
player).
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Music
2.
Tap
3.
Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.
3.
Tap the name field to enter a new name for the playlist.
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search
4.
Tap Done to save the new playlist.
player).
2.
(Menu) ➔ Rename
Adding Songs to Playlists
box.
4.
Tap Playlists ➔ select a playlist ➔
playlist.
(Search).
Tap a matching song to play it. Touch a matching album,
1.
(Apps) ➔
(Music
player).
artist, or playlist to view a list of its songs.
Creating a Playlist
2.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
3.
Tap the name field to enter a name for the playlist.
4.
Tap Done to save the new playlist.
Tap
and select a playlist.
– or –
(Music
Tap Playlists ➔ select a playlist ➔
player).
(Menu) ➔
Add music. All songs are displayed.
➔ New playlist.
3.
Tap
next each song you want to add or next to Add all
to add all songs to the playlist. The songs appear under the
playlist to the right of the songs list.
4.
Tap Done to save the playlist.
Multimedia
107
Removing Songs from Playlists
1.
From a Home screen, tap
Playing a Playlist
(Apps) ➔
(Music
1.
player).
2.
Tap
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
and touch a playlist. All songs are displayed to the
2.
Display the Playlists library view.
left and the songs in the playlist are displayed on the right,
3.
Tap Favorites, Most played, or Recently added, or select a
under the playlist name.
3.
Tap
4.
Tap Done to save the playlist.
playlist title that you created, and tap Play.
Deleting a Playlist
to remove a song from the playlist.
1.
Changing the Order of a Playlist
From a Home screen, tap
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
player).
(Apps) ➔
2.
Tap Playlists and select a playlist.
player).
3.
Tap
2.
Tap Playlists and touch a playlist.
4.
Tap the box next to a playlist title. A check mark
3.
Tap
4.
Tap the grid
1.
(Music
(Reorder) to change the order of the songs.
on an entry and drag the entry to a new
position in the list.
5.
108
(Music
player).
Tap Done to change the order and save the playlist.
(Delete) in the Application bar.
indicates the playlist is to be deleted.
5.
Tap Remove to delete the selected playlist.
(Music
Listening to Music
Changing Music Settings
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music
player).
2.
Tap
(Menu) to display the following options:
• Delete: Tap the box for any song or album you want to delete or tap
the box for Select all to select every song or album. A check mark
indicates the song or album is to be deleted.
Tap Delete to delete the selected items.
• Share via: Share your music by using Dropbox, Bluetooth,
Messaging, Gmail, or Email. Select the songs you want to share
and tap Share.
• Set as alarm tone: Choose a song and tap Set to use the song as
an alarm tone.
• Settings: The following settings display:
– Sound settings: Choose Equalizer and Sound effects settings.
– Music menu: Enable or disable the music display options that appear
on the main music screen. A check mark
next to an option means
that it is enabled.
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in speakers,
through a wired headset or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo
headset. For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on
page 115.
Press the Volume Key
on the side of the device to
activate on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on the
scale to set volume. You can also press the Volume Key to adjust
playback volume.
Re-Accessing the Music Player
If you navigate away from the Music application and music is
playing, you can change songs or easily return to the Music
player:
1.
Once back on a different screen (ex: Home screen), tap the
2.
In the Status Details, tap the song title to display the Music
(Music notification icon) in the System bar.
player. You can also pause and resume playback and skip
to the next or previous song in the panel. For more
information, refer to “Notifications” on page 21.
Multimedia
109
Section 7: Connections
Your device includes features to connect to the internet and to
other devices by using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or a USB cable.
Browser
From the Home screen, tap
(Browser).
– or –
2.
• Tap
Back or
• Touch and hold
Your device is equipped with a full HTML Browser that allows you
to access the internet.
1.
Command Keys
• Tap
to return to the previous page.
Back to display a list of Most visit pages.
to go forward to a recent page.
Touching and dragging
• Touch and drag your finger on the screen to navigate pages and to
reposition pages within the screen.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Browser).
The Most visited screen displays.
Entering text in a field
Tap an entry, such as Google. The Google home screen
Zoom
• Tap the screen twice to zoom in or out.
displays.
• While browsing, tap a text field to display the virtual QWERTY keyboard
to enter text.
• Use two fingers, such as your index finger and
Tip: Browser appears by default as a Primary shortcut on the Home screen.
Navigating the Web
1.
To select an item, tap an entry.
2.
To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your
finger in an up or down motion.
3.
110
Tap
to return to the previous page.
thumb, to zoom out by making an inward pinch
motion on the screen. To zoom in, make an
outward motion by sweeping your fingers out.
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to landscape mode.
Entering a URL
Selecting items on a page
While browsing, use gestures and menus to navigate:
• Tap an item to select it.
• Tap a hyperlink to follow the link.
• Touch and hold on a hyperlink for these options:
– Open: Open the linked page.
– Open in new tab: Open a new window to display the linked page.
– Save link: Save the linked page to Download history.
– Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.
– Select text: Copy the link text to the clipboard.
Using Browser Windows
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Browser).
2.
Tap the URL field at the top of the screen, then enter the
URL using the virtual QWERTY keyboard.
As you enter characters, potential matches display.
Note: Use the
3.
Delete key to clear the URL field, if necessary.
Tap a match to complete the URL.
– or –
You can have multiple windows open at one time and easily
switch between windows.
1.
1.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
Continue entering characters and tap
page.
to load the
(Browser).
2.
To open a new window, tap
3.
To switch to another open window, tap its tab at the top of
at the top of the screen.
the screen.
4.
To delete an open window, tap the tab at the top of the
screen, and then tap
.
Connections
111
Copying Fields or Text
Copying and Pasting a Hyperlink or URL
Copy information from a Web page to the clipboard for pasting,
searching, or sharing.
Selecting, Copying, and Pasting Text
1.
From a Home screen, tap
1.
2.
(Apps) ➔
3.
(Browser).
Browse to a Web page.
3.
On the Web page, touch and hold on the text until you see
4.
screen.
tabs to the left or right to select
more or less text.
While browsing, bookmark a site to quickly access it later.
Creating a bookmark
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Browse to a website, then tap
Add Bookmark.
The Add bookmark options list displays. Confirm the Label
and URL Address for the bookmark.
another application), then touch and hold in a text field and
3.
Tap Add to, touch the drop-down menu, and touch
Bookmarks.
112
(Apps) ➔
(Browser).
To paste the copied text, navigate to the desired field (or to
tap Paste in the pop-up.
To paste the copied link or URL, navigate to the desired
text field and tap Paste on the pop-up menu.
Tap Copy at the top of the screen to copy the selected text
or tap Cancel to stop.
6.
Touch and hold on the link or URL, then tap Copy link URL
Using Bookmarks
The text is highlighted.
5.
Browse to a Web page.
field (or to another application), then touch and hold in a
the text you want highlighted, then stop touching the
Touch and drag the
(Apps) ➔
on the pop-up menu.
2.
4.
From a Home screen, tap
(Browser).
4.
Tap OK to save the bookmark. A gold star
displays on
the Bookmarked page.
Accessing Bookmarks and History
Launch a bookmarked page or reload recent pages.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Browser).
2.
Tap
3.
On the Bookmarks tab, use these options:
Bookmarks and History.
• Tap a bookmark to load the page.
• Tap and hold on a bookmark for these options:
– Open: Open the bookmarked page.
– Open in new tab: Open the linked page in a new window.
– Edit bookmark: Make changes to the bookmark description.
– Add shortcut to home: Create a bookmark on the Home screen.
– Share link: Use Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, or Messaging to
send the link.
– Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.
– Delete bookmark: Remove the bookmark.
– Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home page.
4. On the History tab, tap Most visited, Today, Yesterday, or Last
7 days to use these options:
• Tap a page to reload it.
• Tap the
next to a page to bookmark it.
• Touch and hold on a page for these options:
– Open: Open the Web page.
– Open in new tab: Launch the Web page in a new window.
– Add to bookmarks/Delete bookmark: Bookmark the page or
remove the bookmark for this page.
– Share link: Use Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, or Messaging to
send the link.
– Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.
– Remove from history: Remove the record of this page.
– Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home page.
Browser Menu
While viewing a Web page, tap
(Menu) for options:
• New tab: Open the Web page in a new window, under a new tab.
• New incognito tab: Open the Web page in a new window, under a
new tab, and the pages you view in the new window will not appear in
your browser history or search history. See the on-screen explanation
of going incognito.
• Find on page: Search for content on the current page.
• Share page: Use Bluetooth, Email, or Gmail to send the Web page
URL.
• Save page: Save this page. For more information, refer to
“Downloads” on page 134.
• Page info: View information about the current page, including the URL.
• Downloads: View and manage recent downloads.
• Print: Print the current screen or page to a Samsung printer.
Connections
113
• Settings: Customize the Browser by using the following options:
General
– Set homepage: View and set the default first page that displays when
you launch the Browser.
– Sync with Google Chrome: Associate or remove Android bookmarks
with your Google account.
– Form auto-fill: Enable or disable form auto-fill to complete web forms
with a single click.
– Auto-fill data: If Form auto-fill is enabled, set up the following
information:
• Full name: Enter your name.
• Company name: Enter a company name.
• Address line 1: Enter your address.
• Address line 2: Enter any additional address information.
• City / Town: Enter your city and town.
• State / Province / Region: Enter addition location information.
• Zip code: Enter your ZIP code.
• Country: Enter your country.
• Phone: Enter your telephone number.
• Email: Enter a valid email address.
114
Privacy and Security
– Clear cache: Delete content and databases stored on the device.
– Clear history: Delete the list of previously-visited pages.
– Show security warnings: When enabled, the Browser warns you if
there is a problem with a site’s security.
– Accept cookies: When enabled, allows Browser to save and read
cookie information used by Web pages.
– Clear all cookie data: Delete cookie information saved to the device.
– Remember form data: When enabled, stores information you enter into
forms to make future forms easier.
– Clear form data: Deletes saved form information.
– Enable location: When enabled, sites you visit can request access to
your location.
– Clear location access: Clear location access for all websites.
– Remember passwords: When enabled, saves usernames and
passwords for sites you visit, to make future visits easier.
– Clear passwords: Clear all saved usernames and passwords.
Advanced
– Select search engine: Choose a search engine from Google, Yahoo!, or
Bing.
– Open in background: When enabled, new windows open behind the
current window.
– Enable JavaScript: When enabled, the Browser automatically runs
JavaScript scripts on pages you visit.
– Enable plug-ins: When enabled, the Browser automatically loads and
runs plug-ins on pages you visit.
– Website settings: View and manage settings for individual websites.
– Open pages in overview: When enabled, displays an overview of newlyopened pages.
– Auto-fit pages: When enabled, the Browser automatically sizes Web
pages to fit your device’s display.
– Block pop-up tabs: When enabled, blocks pop-up windows.
– Load images: When enabled, images are automatically loaded when
you visit a page. When disabled, images are indicated by a link, which
you can touch to download the picture.
– Text encoding: Choose a default character set for Web pages.
– Reset to default: Clear all browser data and reset all settings to the
factory defaults.
Labs
– Quick controls: When enabled, to the left or right edge of the screen
and swipe inward to access quick controls and hide Application and
URL bars. To cancel, display the Quick controls and touch Menu
➔ Settings ➔ Labs and uncheck Quick controls.
– Most Visited Homepage: Sets your homepage to show the most
visited pages.
– Google Instant: When enabled, you can use Google Instant when you
use Google Search to show results as you type. Enabling this option can
increase date use.
Emptying the Cookies
A cookie is a small file placed on your device by a website during
navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific
information, a cookie can also contain some personal information
(such as a username and password) which might pose a security
risk if not properly managed. You can clear these cookies from
your device at any time.
1.
From a Web page, tap
(Menu) ➔ Settings ➔ Privacy
and security ➔ Clear all cookie data.
2.
Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless
devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to
approximately 30 feet.
You do not need to line up the devices to send information with
Bluetooth. If the devices are in range, you can exchange
information between them, even if they are in different rooms.
Connections
115
Turning Bluetooth On or Off
Bluetooth Settings
To turn Bluetooth on:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Bluetooth settings.
2.
Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark
indicates active). When Bluetooth is enabled, a green
check mark appears next to the field and
appears on
the screen.
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Bluetooth settings.
2.
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the
characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:
• Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
• Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth
devices
• Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Bluetooth settings.
(Settings)
2.
Verify Bluetooth is active. Indicated by a green check mark
in the Bluetooth field.
Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature.
3.
Tap the Device name, Visible, Visible time-out, Show
received files, and Find nerby devices fields to set the
options.
To change your Bluetooth name:
116
1.
Verify Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name.
3.
Enter a new name.
4.
Tap OK to complete the rename process.
To set visibility:
1.
Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible.
Making your device visible allows other devices to pair and
communicate.
Pairing with a Bluetooth Device
Search for a Bluetooth device and pair with it, to exchange
information between your device and the target device.
Tip: After pairing, your device and the target device recognize each other and
exchange information without having to enter a passcode or PIN.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Bluetooth settings.
Note: Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible
time-out field (2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Never). This value
appears as a countdown within this Visible time-out field.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
2.
Tap Bluetooth to turn on Bluetooth.
3.
Enable the target device’s discoverable or visible mode.
4.
Tap Find nearby devices.
5.
From the list of scanned devices, touch the target device,
1.
Verify Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Find nearby devices
then follow the prompts to complete the pairing:
to search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices
• If the target device requires a PIN, enter a PIN for the target device
and tap OK. When prompted, enter the PIN on the target device.
• If the device allows automatic or smart pairing, your device
attempts to pair with the device automatically. Follow the prompts
on your device and the target device to complete the pairing.
such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
To view files received via Bluetooth devices:
1.
Navigate to the Bluetooth settings page.
2.
Tap Show received files to display a list fo files received
from external sources via Bluetooth communication.
3.
Tap
to return to the previous page.
Connections
117
Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device
2.
1.
Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously paired
device (from the bottom of the page).
3.
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
name of the previously paired device (from the bottom of
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between
the device and your device, but retains the knowledge of the
pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device,
there is no need to setup the connection information again.
the page). This opens the connected device’s menu
options.
• Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.
Enable Downloading for Web Applications
Important!: Before you can download a web application you must enable the
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading).
Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
– or –
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications.
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
name of the previously paired device, and select
2.
Tap the Unknown sources check box.
Disconnect.
3.
Tap OK to allow install of non-Market applications.
Tap again to remove the checkmark and disable the
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the
paired device goes out of range of your device or it is powered off.
Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record”
and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the
previous pairing information.
1.
118
Verify Bluetooth is active.
installation of non-market applications.
Warning!: Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to protect
your device and data, use Android Market to install web
applications.
Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi is a wireless networking technology that provides access to
local area networks. Use your device’s Wi-Fi feature to:
• Access the internet for browsing or to send and receive email.
• Access your corporate network.
• Use hotspots provided by hotels or airports while traveling.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing Wireless
Access Point (WAP). WAPs can be Open (unsecured, as with most
hotspots) or Secured (requiring you to provide login credentials).
Your device supports the 802.11 a/b/g/n Wi-Fi protocol.
Configuring Wi-Fi Settings
For more information about configuring your device’s Wi-Fi
settings, see “Wi-Fi settings” on page 168.
Finding Wi-Fi Networks
You can have your device automatically notify you of available
networks. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on
page 168.
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off
Turn your device’s Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn Wi-Fi
service on, your device automatically searches for available,
in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).
Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).
Turning Wi-Fi On:
1.
From any screen, sweep your finger downward from the
top to display the Notification Panel.
2.
Tap Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On.
– or –
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
Tap Wi-Fi to activate the feature. A checkmark indicates
that Wi-Fi is active. The device scans for available in-range
wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks
on the same screen.
Connections
119
Turning Wi-Fi Off:
1.
2.
connect. If the Wi-Fi network is open, your device
automatically connects. If the Wi-Fi network is secured,
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
When you turn on Wi-Fi, your device searches for available Wi-Fi
connections, then displays them on screen.
From any screen, sweep your finger downward from the
top to display the Notification Panel.
Network Notification
Have your device alert you to new Wireless Access Points (WAPs).
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
Tap Notify me. A check mark displayed next to the feature
indicates Network notification is active.
3.
Tap Notify me again to remove the check mark and
deactivate this feature.
Wi-Fi Sleep Policy
Specify when to disconnect from Wi-Fi.
1.
Tap Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On. Your device automatically scans
for available Wireless Access Points.
120
enter the password at the prompt to connect.
Tap Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi Off.
The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:
2.
When the scan is complete, tap a Wi-Fi network to
top to display the Notification Panel.
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
1.
3.
From any screen, sweep your finger downward from the
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks.
2.
Tap Wi-Fi settings, then tap Wi-Fi sleep policy.
3.
Tap When screen turns off, Never when plugged in, or Never.
Adding a Wi-Fi Network Manually
1.
From a Home screen, tap
6.
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
Tap Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On.
3.
Touch Add Wi-Fi network, then enter the Network SSID (the
4.
Tap the Security field and select a security option. This
name of your Wireless Access Point).
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
• Network SSID: Enter the name of the Wi-Fi Wireless Access
Point (WAP).
• Security: Select the type of security used by the WAP.
• Password: If the WAP is secured, enter the password or hex key.
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP, additional
network information may be required.
Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the
target WAP.
Connecting to Kies
Kies allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your
phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. You
can view and share call logs, videos, photos, music, bookmarks,
ringtones, and even send SMS messages from your PC.
Tip: Before beginning, it is recommended that you update the Java
application running on your machine and that you install Samsung Kies
on your target computer.
Installing Samsung Kies
To learn more about Samsung Kies and Samsung applications,
browse featured applications and download Kies at:
http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads.
Note: Samsung Kies works on both PC and Macintosh computers.
Note: If adding a Wi-Fi connection manually, you will need to enter Proxy
settings and IP settings.
5.
Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.
Connections
121
Connecting With Samsung Kies
Connecting Kies via Wi-Fi
1.
Sign onto the same Wi-Fi network from your phone and
1.
Install Samsung Kies software on your PC.
from your PC.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Warning!: Close any running applications before connecting your device to a
PC.
(Settings) ➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Kies via Wi-Fi.
3.
If prompted, select a network. Choose from either Wi-Fi or
2.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications ➔ Development ➔ USB debugging.
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Make sure this setting is not checked. If this option is
checked, Samsung Kies will not function properly.
Important!: Both your device and your computer must be connected to the
same Wireless Acccess Point (WAP).
3.
4.
From your computer, launch the Samsung Kies application
Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction
jack on your device to a PC.
and follow the on-screen prompts.
5.
Follow the on-screen instructions to view and share
Note: PC connection is only available in idle mode. Tap
necessary.
(Home Key), if
information between your phone and PC. Refer to
Samsung Kies Help for more information.
4.
Run Samsung Kies and follow the prompts to update your
device firmware.
5.
122
Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information.
Tethering
To disconnect tethering:
This option allows you to share your device’s mobile data
connection via a direct USB connection between your device and
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be
the Mobile AP feature.
Note: If additional software or USB drivers are required, navigate to: http://
www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
2.
Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the
check mark and deactivate the feature.
3.
Remove the USB cable from the device.
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
2.
Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your
device.
3.
When prompted for a USB mode, tap
to exit the
menu.
4.
Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places a
green check mark next to the entry and activates the
feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active notification briefly
appears on the screen.
Look for the Tethering active icon
in the Status bar
area of the screen.
Connections
123
Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot
7.
This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi-Fi hotspot.
The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA+
(4G) data services (although 3G service can also be used).
Important!: The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as
Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi connection prior to launching the
Mobile AP service.
Note: You must have a tethering plan on your account to use the Wi-Fi
hotspot. You can not use data on the device while it is being used as a
hotspot.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Note: By default, the connection is open and not secured. It is recommended
that you access the Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot settings and create a
secure connection by using a password for communication.
Note: Using your 4G service and Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot drains your device’s
battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature
combination.
The best way to keep using the device as a hotspot is to have it
connected to a power supply.
(Settings)
1.
Tap Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. This places a checkmark in the
adjacent field to activate the service.
3.
If prompted, tap Yes to continue with the activation.
4.
Tap Configure portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
5.
Create a new Network SSID name and then write it down.
6.
Select a Security option (Open or WPA-PSK) then tap Save.
124
Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target device
(laptop, media device, etc.).
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
2.
appears at the
bottom of the screen.
To connect to the Hotspot:
To activate the Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot service:
1.
Confirm the Mobile AP service icon
2.
Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select your
device hotspot from the network list.
• The SSID name for your device’s hotspot is determined by what you
entered into the Network SSID field.
• You can change the name by tapping Configure portable Wi-Fi
hotspot ➔ Network SSID and changing the entry.
3. Select this Hotspot and follow your on-screen instructions
to complete the connection.
4.
Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet
connection.
To secure the Portable Hotspot service:
The two most common methods for securing your connection to
the Hotspot are to a security method (WPA2 PSK) and to Hide
your device’s SSID name.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot
➔ Configure portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
2.
Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK.
3.
With security enabled, enter a new password into the
Password field.
Important!: The more complex the password, the harder it will be for
intruders to break your security. It is recommended that you not
use names, birthdays, or other personal information.
4.
Managing Downloads
Files, apps, and other items you download in Browser, Gmail,
Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal
storage. You can use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or
delete what you have downloaded.
To manage the demands on their networks or to help you avoid
unexpected charges, some mobile networks place restrictions on
the size of the files you can download. When you are connected
to such networks, and you try to download an oversized-file, you
are asked or required to delay downloading the file until the next
time you are connected to a Wi-Fi network. At that time, the
download resumes automatically. The Downloads app can also
be used to view and manage these queued files.
Downloaded files are stored in the Download directory in your
tablet’s internal storage. You can view and copy files from this
directory when connected to a computer with a USB cable.
Tap Save to store the new settings.
Connections
125
Uninstalling an App
Apps come pre-installed on your device and you can download
additional apps from Market. If you decide to, you can uninstall
apps you downloaded from Market and other sources.
To uninstall an app:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications ➔ Manage applications.
2.
Tap the Downloaded tab.
3.
Tap the app you want to uninstall.
4.
Tap the Uninstall button.
The Uninstall application? pop-up displays.
5.
Tap OK to confirm you want to uninstall the app.
You can also use Market to uninstall apps you downloaded from
there (see “Market” on page 144.).
To uninstall an app from the My apps screen:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps).
2.
Tap the My apps tab in the Application Bar.
3.
Touch and hold an the app’s icon and drag it to the
(Remove) icon to uninstall and remove the app from
your tablet.
126
Note: You cannot uninstall the apps that are included with Android. You can
only uninstall the apps you have downloaded.
Section 8: Applications and Widgets
This section contains a description of each application that is
available on the Apps screen, its function, and how to navigate
through that particular application. If the application is already
described in another section of this user manual, then a cross
reference to that particular section is provided. Various widgets
are also described.
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-used
applications to one of the Home screens. For details, see “Adding a
Shortcut from the Apps Screen” on page 38.
GPS Applications
GPS applications allow you to achieve real-time, GPS-enabled,
turn-by-turn navigation and to access local searches based on a
variety of category parameters.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
• inside a building or between buildings
• in a tunnel or underground passage
• in poor weather
• around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
• in a vehicle with tinted windows
Global GPS turn-by-turn navigation, mapping, and Point of
Interest content is available for three continents, including North
America (U.S., Canada, and Mexico), Western Europe, and China,
where wireless coverage is available.
Important!: If you touch or cover the internal GPS antenna while using GPS
services, it may impede the GPS signal resulting in the GPS
services not working in an optimal manner. Refer to the following
diagram to locate the approximate location of the internal GPS
antenna.
Location of Internal
GPS Antenna
(Back view
of device)
Applications and Widgets
127
Alarm
Activating Alarms
Set alarms for reminders or for wake-up times.
Adding and Configuring Alarms
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
3.
Tap fields to configure the alarm:
(Apps) ➔
• Time: Set a time for the alarm to sound. Tap + or - to change the
hour and minute, and select AM or PM.
• Label: Enter a name for the alarm.
• Repeat: Choose days for the alarm to repeat. Alarm days are blue.
• Ringtone: Choose a tone for alarms.
• Vibrate: Enable or disable vibration for the alarm.
• Snooze: Enable or disable the snooze option for the alarm.
4. Tap Done to save the new alarm.
The main Alarm screen displays showing the new or
128
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
(Apps) ➔
(Alarm).
(Turn alarm on) to activate the alarm. A gray
alarm means the alarm is deactivated.
(Alarm).
(Add alarm) or touch an alarm that already set.
updated alarm.
1.
3.
Tap an alarm to change any of its settings and then select
Done to save the updates.
Deactivating and Deleting Alarms
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Alarm).
2.
Touch and hold an alarm and then touch one of the
following options:
• Delete alarm: Delete the alarm.
• Deactivate alarm: Turn off the alarm.
– or –
Tap an existing alarm and select Delete. The Delete alarm
pop-up displays. Tap OK.
Alarm Settings
Alarm Volume
To configure general alarm settings:
1.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
Tap
Setting alarm volume by using the Settings app:
(Apps) ➔
(Alarm).
1.
(Settings)
➔ Sound ➔ Volume.
(Settings). The following options are displayed:
• Alarm in Silent mode: Enable alarms to play even if the tablet is in
Silent mode.
• Alarm volume: Touch and drag the slider to set Alarm volume.
• Snooze duration: Set the snooze delay time to 3, 5, 10, 15, or
30 minutes.
• Snooze repeat: Indicate how many times to repeat the snooze
alarm: 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 times.
• Side button settings: Set what action the side buttons should take
during an alarm: None, Snooze, or Dismiss.
• Set default ringtone: Choose a ringtone to play as a default, if the
Ringtone is not defined for an alarm. Tap the button next to the
ringtone you want to set and tap OK.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Touch and drag the slider to set Alarm volume.
Another method of setting the alarm volume:
1.
Press
2.
Tap
(Volume key).
3.
Touch and drag the slider next to
on the pop-up.
(Alarm).
Applications and Widgets
129
Asphalt 6
Books
Provides access to a built-in HD racing video game.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
Use the Books app to read eBooks from the web-based Google
Books service. Google eBooks is a new way to discover, buy, and
enjoy your favorite books online and offline.
(Apps) ➔
(Asphalt 6).
2.
Follow the on-screen prompts.
Blio
Blio® is an eReading application that presents eBooks just like
the printed version, in full color, and with all of the features you’d
want from an eReader.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Books).
The Google Books main screen displays.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
If prompted, tap OK to use the Compatability zoom function
books you have previously selected between your Books
for this application.
account and your device.
3.
Read the on-screen license information and tap Agree.
4.
Read the on-screen welcome information and tap Close.
upper-right Application bar.
5.
Tap an available on-screen option and follow the prompts.
• A pop-up displays the Android Market Terms of Service and the
Google Books Terms of Service. Read each document and tap
Accept.
• Browse the selection of Google eBooks, which are arranged in
categories like New Arrivals, Top Selling, Top Rated, Top Free, and
many more. There is also an additional Category panel on that can
also provide easy access.
Choose from: Get, Shop, Search, and Read.
130
(Blio).
You can read books online or mark them for availability offline, so
you can read them when you have no Internet connection (such
as on an airplane). You can also use Books as your starting point
for browsing or searching for books on line.
2.
3.
If prompted, tap Turn sync on. This synchronizes your
To add more books to your library, tap Shop in the
4.
To find a book by title or author name, tap
the Books main screen or tap Shop ➔
5.
Tap
Search on
Search.
(Menu) for these options:
• Make available offline: Mark books to make them available offline.
Touch below a book cover to mark it with
a pin and then tap
Done. Just reverse this process to remove books from your device.
• Accounts: Set the account to use.
• Refresh: If a book in your library does not appear on your device,
use this option to update the display.
• Help: Displays various Book help information. Tap Help Center to
get additional Google Book information.
6. Tap the cover of a book to start reading.
Once the book displays, sweep across the screen to turn
the page or tap
for a table of contents. Tap
to
set Show, Brightness, Text settings, and Line height.
7.
Browser
Your device includes a full HTML Browser, to access the internet.
For more information, refer to “Browser” on page 110.
Tip: A shortcut to Browser appears on the main Home screen by default.
䊳
(Apps) ➔
(Books) ➔
(Menu) ➔ Help.
(Browser).
– or –
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Browser).
Calculator
The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions to solve
simple arithmetic problems and advanced operators to solve
more complex problems.
1.
To contact customer support, report an issue, and display
more Google eBooks information, from a Home screen, tap
From the Home screen, tap
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Calculator).
2.
Enter the first number using the numeric keys.
3.
Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
+ (add), - (subtract), × (multiply), or ÷ (divide) key.
4.
Enter the next number.
5.
To view the result, tap the = (equals) key.
Applications and Widgets
131
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5 as many times as required.
7.
Touch and hold
8.
For more advanced problems, use the advanced operators
9.
3.
other weeks. Swipe up or down the screen to view other
(Delete) to clear the result.
months or events list.
sin, ln, cos, log, tan, and so on, just as you would on a
4.
pocket calculator.
5.
Tap
(Search) to find an event. Use the on-screen
contents of the display. Text copied displays. Paste the
search your calendar.
6.
The first time you open the Calendar application on your tablet, it
displays any existing calendar events from your Google Account
on the web.
(Apps) ➔
(Calendar).
Tap a tab to choose a calendar view:
•
•
•
•
(New event) to add a new event to your calendar.
on page 133.
Record events and appointments to manage your schedule.
From a Home screen, tap
Tap
on the keypad to
For more information, refer to “Creating a Calendar Event”
Calendar
132
(Today) to return to the current date.
keypad to enter a search term. Tap
copied value in another app.
2.
Tap
Touch and hold the Calculator’s display to copy the
The Calculator functions similarly in landscape or portrait mode.
1.
Swipe left or right across the screen to view other days or
Day: Display today’s schedule and scroll to other days.
Week: Display the current week and scroll to other weeks.
Month: Display the current month and scroll to other months.
List: Display only event names and dates for a selected year.
7.
Tap
(Menu) for these options:
• Go to: Use the Set date pop-up to enter a date and then touch Set
to display that date on your calendar.
• Delete: Delete events for the day, week, month, before today, or all
events, depending on the calendar view.
• Sync calendars: Manually synchronizes the calendar entries
among all of your current accounts (ex:Yahoo, Gmail, Exchange,
etc..).
• Settings: Customize the calendar. For more information, refer to
“Customizing the Calendar” on page 133.
• Show/Hide controls: Toggles the visibility of an additional window
to the right of the screen. This window shows an overview calendar
and the events scheduled for the currently selected day.
Creating a Calendar Event
Managing Calendar Events
Note: These steps create the initial Calendar entry. After creation, you will
need to tap edit the new event to configure attendants, what email
account it is associated with, etc..
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Calendar).
2.
You can view and add events in Google Calendar on your mobile
device, but, to delete existing events, you must access Google
Calendar on a computer.
To delete a non-Google event:
1.
(Calendar).
Touch and hold the date for which you want to enter an
2.
event.
Tap the date for which you want to enter an event, then
3.
Select a day and tap an event. A pop-up displays event
information.
– or –
tap
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(New event).
Enter the event information in the Calendar event screen,
then tap Done.
3.
Select from the following options:
• Tap
Delete and then select OK to delete the event.
• Tap Send via and then select Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email,
Messaging, or Wi-Fi to share the event.
• Tap Edit to update the event details.
Customizing the Calendar
To add additional accounts and set up Calendar preferences:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Calendar).
(Menu) ➔ Settings.
2.
Tap
3.
Tap Add account to display the Add account option. Select
an account type and enter your account information.
Applications and Widgets
133
4.
Tap the following for additional settings:
• Calendar view settings:
– Calendars: Enable calendars for your various accounts.
– Synchronise calendars: Displays the General sync settings. For more
information, refer to “General Sync Settings” on page 185.
– Week views: Choose to display weeks as either Analog or Timeline.
– First day of week: Choose a day to begin each week.
– Hide declined events: Enable or disable display of events.
– Hide contacts anniversary events: Enable or disable display of
contact anniversary events.
– Show week number: Show the week number to the left of each week
in the Month view and the inset calendar in the Day view.
– Lock time zone: Allows you to lock event times and dates based on
your selected time zone, which is defined by the following field.
– Select time zone: If Lock time zone is enabled, used this option to
select a time zone to lock event times and dates.
• Reminder settings:
– Notifications: Touch to select, which allows you to set the Select
ringtone and Pop-up notification options.
– Select ringtone: Choose a tone for calendar notifications.
– Pop-up notification: Set a pop-up notification as a calendar event
notification.
– Default reminder time: Set the default time for a notification before an
event is to occur.
5. Tap About calendar for additional Calendar information.
134
Camera
Take photos and record video with your device’s built in Camera.
For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on page 79.
Tip: A shortcut to Camera appears on the main Home screen by default.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Camera).
– or –
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Camera).
Contacts
Store contact information for your friends, family and colleagues,
to quickly access information or to send a message. For more
information, refer to “Contacts” on page 53.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Contacts).
Downloads
Files, apps, and other items you download in Browser, Gmail,
Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal
storage. Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete what
you have downloaded.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Downloads).
(Apps) ➔
2.
Tap an available file category tab (Browser downloads or
Other downloads) and select the desired file. Touch
headings for earlier downloads to view them.
3.
Tap items you want to send, to check them, and then tap
(Share). Tap an option to share the item. Depending
on the file type, options can include: Bluetooth, Dropbox,
Dropbox creates a folder that automatically synchronizes its
contents across all of your connected devices on your account.
Update a file to your dropbox on your computer, and its
automatically updated to the same folder on your other devices.
Download the desktop application
1.
http://www.dropbox.com/.
Email, Gmail, Messaging, Picasa, YouTube, Social Hub, or
Wi-Fi.
4.
Tap items you want to delete, to check them, and then tap
5.
Tap Sort by size or Sort by date, at the bottom of the
(Delete). The items are deleted from your tablet.
Use your computer’s browser to navigate to:
2.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install this application
on your target computer containing the desired files.
Important!: The computer application must be installed on the computer
containing the desired files.
This computer must have an active Internet connection.
Downloads pop-up, to switch back and forth.
Dropbox
Works to provide access to your desktop files directly from your
device. This applications allows you to bring your files with you
when you're on the go, edit files in your Dropbox from your
device, upload photos and videos to Dropbox, and share your
selected files freely with family and friends.
The in-device application works in conjunction with a partner
program placed on a target computer using an active Internet
connection.
Note: It might be necessary to configure your router’s firewall settings to
allow this application to gain access to the Internet.
Accessing Dropbox on your Device
1.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Dropbox).
2.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
3.
Tap an item to open it.
Applications and Widgets
135
eBook
4.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(eBook).
The eBook main screen displays.
2.
Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Confirm.
• Touch and drag either
tab to select more or less text.
• Select Memo and use the keyboard to create a memo about the
selected text.
5. Tap an area of the page and then select
(Menu) for
Options While Reading a Book
these options:
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap the cover of a book or PDF to start reading.
• Table of contents: Displays a table of contents for the book. Touch
an entry to display that page in the book.
• Bookmarks: Displays bookmarked pages. Touch an entry to
display that page in the book.
• Highlights: Displays pages on which highlights have been made.
• Memos: Displays pages on which memos have been created and
the memo text.
• Drawings: Displays pages on which drawings have been made.
• Information: Displays various information about the book, such as
author, format, size, and download date.
(eBook).
Once the book displays, sweep across the screen to turn
the page.
3.
Tap the screen to display options that can be used while
reading a book.
• There are options on the top, left that let you highlight text, draw on
the page, erase drawings, and configure the pen and highlighting.
• There are options on the top, right that let you set the font and
theme, set the speed and pitch of text-to-speech, search the book,
and bookmark pages in the book.
Note: For Bookmarks, Highlights, Memos, and Drawings, tap
and then tap entries or Select all to delete entries.
6.
136
Touch and hold a word in a book to display the following
options: Copy, Highlight, Memo, and Search.
This application lets you access and read books on your device.
Tap
(Delete)
(Back) to return to the eBook main screen.
Managing Your Books
6.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(eBook).
2.
In the Application bar, on the upper left of the eBook main
3.
To find a book by title or author name, tap
(Search),
use the keypad to enter a key word or phrase to search for,
and touch Go on the keypad to search.
4.
Tap
touch Recent, Title, Authors, or Categories to view your
books in a different way.
5.
To add more books to your library, tap
Email
Send and receive email using popular email services. For more
information, refer to “Email” on page 73.
䊳
(List) to view your books in a list mode. Then
(Shop).
A pop-up displays several book sellers and their internet
webpage addresses. Tap a link to shop for more books, tap
Add store to add a new webpage, or tap Delete to delete
one or more of the existing webpage entries.
(Menu) for these options:
• Edit: Tap
to select books to be deleted and then tap Done.
• Import: Add books from MyFiles.
• Accounts: To read books, create or sign in to Adobe ID account,
which allows you to open copyright protected books.
screen, tap All to display all books and PDFs, Book to
display only books, and PDF to display only PDFs.
Tap
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Email.
Files
Find, view, and manage folders and files, such as music files,
photo files, video files, and so on, stored on your tablet. If the file
is associated with an application on your device, you can launch
the file in the application.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate a file.
Files.
Note: You may have to touch one or more subfolders before you encounter
files.
3.
Tap a file to launch it in the associated application, if the
file is associated with an application.
Applications and Widgets
137
4.
While browsing files, use these controls:
Up: Display a higher directory.
Root: Display the root directory.
Add Folder: Add a new folder in the current folder.
Display mode: Enable or disable thumbnails for
each file.
Mark files: Touch the box to the left of each file or
next to the folder to select all files in the folder.
Then touch send, copy, cut, or delete in the
Application bar.
5.
While viewing a photo file:
• Tap
(Slideshow) to view a slideshow of the photos in the
folder. Tap the screen to stop the slideshow and view the photo
being displayed.
• Tap
(Share) to share the file using Social Hub, Messaging,
Picasa, Wi-Fi, Dropbox, Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email.
138
• Tap
(Delete) to delete the photo.
• Tap
(Menu) to display the following options for photos:
– Details: Provides details about the photo such as Title, Time, Location,
Width, Height, File Size, and so on. Tap the X to close the pop-up.
– Show on map: This option displays if a Location exists for the photo. A
Location is added to the photo if GPS tag is set On in the Camera
settings. Tap this option to open the Map app and display the Location
where the photo was taken. For more information, refer to “Camera
Options” on page 80.
Caution!: Be aware that your location may be present on a photo when
posting your photos on the internet.
– Rotate Left: Allows you to rotate the picture counterclockwise 90
degrees.
– Rotate Right: Allows you to rotate the picture clockwise 90 degrees.
– Set picture as: Assign the photo as a Contact photo, Lock Screen, or
Wallpaper.
– Crop: Allows you to crop the image. Touch and drag the crop box or the
sides or corners of the crop box to create the crop area, then tap Ok.
Tap X to stop without cropping the picture.
– Print: Print the current photo to a Samsung printer.
– Copy: Copy the current photo to the clipboard.
– Motion: Display Motion settings. For more information, refer to
“Motion Settings” on page 189.
6.
While viewing a video file:
• Tap
(Bookmark) to mark your favorite areas of the video. A
yellow mark appears on the progress bar.
• Tap
(Menu) for the following options:
– Share via: Share this video by using Messaging, YouTube, Wi-Fi,
Dropbox, Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email.
– Bookmarks: If bookmarks have been set for this video, a thumbnail
and time are displayed for each bookmark. Tap
to remove a
bookmark.
– Color tone: Set the color tone to Normal, Warm, or Cold.
– Outdoor visibility: Turn outdoor visibility On or Off.
– Details: Provides details about the video, such as Name, Size,
Resolution, Duration, Format, and Date modified.
Gallery
Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
For more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 87.
(Gallery).
Get Web Now
Allows you to enable your device to be used on the T-Mobile
Broadband network for high-speed data access. Once activated,
you’ll be able to purchase a Pre-paid Mobile Broadband pass that
will allow you to access and browse the Web.
This is an applications that allows you to purchase pre-paid Web
minutes if you do not already have a monthly data plan.
Important!: If you already have an activated pre-paid pass or a monthly data
plan on your account, there is no need to use this service.
1.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Get Web
Now).
2.
Read the on-screen information.
3.
Tap Continue to begin using the Internet.
Gmail
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based email.
For more information, refer to “Gmail” on page 71.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gmail).
Applications and Widgets
139
Google Search
Latitude
Search the internet, and your device, using the Google search
engine.
Tip: The Google Search widget appears on a Home screen by default. For
information about displaying widgets on the Home screen, see “Adding
Widgets to a current screen” on page 35.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
(Apps) ➔
Use the keypad to enter search criteria to display matching
searches.
Suggestions display below the text entry area.
3.
You must first set up your tablet to use wireless networks to help
pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when Wi-Fi is
enabled.
(Google).
– or –
From a Home screen, tap
(Google Search).
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your
location.
Important!: For best results, it is recommended that you enable all of your
location services. For more information, refer to “Location and
Security” on page 179.
Note: Although you do not have to enable location services in order to use
Latitude, it is recommended for best accuracy.
1.
– or –
Tap Go to start the search.
A browser window displays the search results.
140
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Settings)
➔ Location and security ➔ Use wireless networks.
Tap a suggestion to search for that term.
A green check mark
2.
indicates the feature is enabled.
Log on to your Google account.
To create a Google account or set up your Google account
on your device use Accounts and sync settings. For more
information, refer to “Accounts and Sync” on page 185.
3.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Latitude). Your location is displayed on the map, accurate
For more information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude.
to 30 meters.
Latitude Menu
Sharing Your Location with Friends
1.
From the Latitude map screen, tap
their location will display on your tablet. They can share their
location from their computer, phone, or tablet.
Latitude
to
1.
is displayed.
2.
is not already enabled.
(Menu) ➔ Add friends.
3.
Tap
4.
Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address.
5.
Select a contact.
– or –
Enter an email address and tap Send on the keypad.
6.
2.
At the Send sharing requests prompt, tap Yes.
Your friend will receive an email or text message with your
location marked on a map. They will also receive instructions on
how to view your location from the web or use Latitude on their
device, if it is available. Once they acknowledge your request,
(Apps) ➔
Tap
Latitude
to display your Latitude list of
friends.
Tap Wi-Fi Disabled - Click to enable connection to navigate
to the Wi-Fi Settings menu where you can turn on Wi-Fi if it
From a Home screen, tap
(Latitude).
display your Latitude list of friends. At first, only your name
3.
Tap
(Menu) for these options:
• Refresh friends: Update your Latitude list of friends.
• Check in: Automatically check in at specific places you designate,
and you will be checked in when you are there.
• Add friends: Share your location with friends. For more
information, refer to “Sharing Your Location with Friends”
on page 141.
• Settings: Used to set various Latitude options.
– Detect your location: Enable or disable whether your location is
updated automatically.
– Set your location: Set your location manually.
– Do not detect your location: Your friends cannot see your automatic
location.
– Enable location history: This history is only seen by you.
Applications and Widgets
141
– Enable automatic check-ins: Checks you in to places that you have
designated.
– Enable check-in notifications: Enables notifications that suggest
places to check in.
– Manage your places: View and modify your automatic check-ins and
muted places.
– Sign out of Latitude: Signs you out of Latitude and launches the Maps
application.
• My Places: Display starred locations.
• Join Latitude/Latitude: Join Latitude, to share your location with
friends you choose and Google.
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.
• Labs: Access experimental features.
• Switch Account: Choose a different Google account.
• Cache Settings: Enable or disable Prefetch on mobile or Clear
map tile cache.
• Help: Learn about Google maps.
• Terms, Privacy & Notices: View information about Google Maps,
including the Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy, Legal Notices,
and Web History.
• About: View information about Maps.
For the remaining options, see “Maps Menu” on page 143.
Maps
Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions, and
other location-based information. The Google Maps shortcut
appears by default on the Home screen.
Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some features require
Standalone or Google location services. For more information, refer to
“Location and Security” on page 179.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Maps).
– or –
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Maps).
Navigating the Map
Zooming
• Double-tap on the screen to zoom in.
• Use two fingers, such as your index finger and
thumb, to zoom out by making an inward pinch
motion on the screen. To zoom in, make an
outward motion by sweeping your fingers out.
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to landscape mode.
Scrolling
• Touch and drag on the screen to reposition the map in the display.
142
Other Map Options
Tap
• Tap an icon on the map to display information about the location. For
example, your location is indicated by a flashing
says My Location.
Maps Menu
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
While viewing a map, tap
Tap the indicated icon to use these additional Map options:
and a pop-up that
(Maps).
(Menu) for these options:
• My Places: Display starred locations.
• Join Latitude/Latitude: Join Latitude, to login to the latitude
service and share your location with friends you choose and
Google.
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.
• Labs: Access experimental features.
• Switch Account: Choose a different Google account.
• Cache Settings: Enable or disable Prefetch on mobile or Clear
map tile cache.
• Help: Learn about Google maps.
• Terms, Privacy & Notices: View information about Google Maps,
including the Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy, Legal Notices,
and Web History.
• About: View information about Maps.
For more information, refer to “Latitude Menu” on page 141.
Search Maps: Use the keypad to enter your request to
Search the map for a city, location, and so on.
Suggestions are displayed as you type.
Speak: Just speak a city, location, and so on, to
display.
Compass: Set the map to always display north at the
top of the screen or to automatically rotate like a
compass, keeping north on the map facing north, and
so on. Your device may have to be calibrated the first
time you use this feature. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
Places: Launch the Places app. For more information,
refer to “Places” on page 154.
Applications and Widgets
143
Directions: Displays the Directions pop-up. Enter Start
point and End point or touch the button to the right of
the fields to choose your current location, a contact’s
location, or to touch a point on the map.
Market
Browse for new Android applications, games, or downloads for
your device. You must have a Google account set up on your
device to download a new application.
• Tap the automobile, bus, bicycle, or walking icon
for the appropriate directions. Then tap Go to
display a list of directions.
Tip: A shortcut to Market appears on the main Home screen by default.
1.
• Tap the Directions list and scroll up or down.
(Market).
– or –
• Tap an entry in the Directions list to show the point
From a Home screen, tap
mentioned on the map.
Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display.
Choose from Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Latitude, My
Maps, or Bicycling.
From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Market).
2.
The first time you open Market, read the Terms of Service,
then tap Accept to continue.
3.
Browse for items to install, or tap the category tab and
select from:
• Apps: Displays applications, games, and more, which you can
browse by categories, such as games, business, entertainment,
education, and so on.
• Books: New arrivals and top selling books, which you can also
browse by categories, such as children’s books, fantasy, fiction,
history, and more.
• Movies: New available videos are displayed.
144
4.
While browsing, tap
(Menu) for the following options:
• Accounts: Tap the account you want to use.
• Clear search history: Clear the history of previous searches.
• Purchase history: Display a list of the apps you have purchased
including free apps.
• App content filter: Set which apps are displayed and can be
downloaded to this device. The choices are apps rated for:
Everyone, Low maturity, Medium maturity, High maturity, and Show
all apps. Tap OK when you have made your choices.
• Help: Get help for using Android Market.
• Contact us: Contact the Market Help center.
My Apps
1.
From the main Android Market screen, tap Apps ➔ My apps
in the Application Bar to display information about apps
you have on your device. Tap an app and then select:
• Open: Launch the application.
• Update: Check for updates for the app.
• Allow automatic updating: Allow this app to be updated
automatically.
• Uninstall updates: Uninstall previously installed updates.
• Uninstall: Uninstall the app and remove it from your device. You
cannot uninstall the apps that are included with Android. You can
only uninstall the apps you have downloaded.
Warning!: Uninstall updates and Uninstall do not ask for a confirmation.
2.
Tap
(Menu) for the following options:
• Notify about app updates: Enable or disable notifications for app
updates.
• Add shortcuts for new apps: Enable or disable the addition of
shortcuts on the Home screen for new apps.
Media Hub
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and
TV content.
For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 92.
Note: Media Hub service requires a Media Hub account and depends on
service availability.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Media Hub).
Applications and Widgets
145
Memo
Create and manage text memos and use Bluetooth to send
memos to paired Bluetooth devices.
Composing a Memo
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
(Apps) ➔
(Memo).
(New Memo), compose the memo, then select
Done to save.
For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 41.
Memo List Options
While viewing the list of Memos:
1.
Tap
(List) to view your memos in a list mode. Touch an
entry in the list on the left to view the memo on the right of
the screen.
2.
To delete one or more memos, tap
(Delete), select one
or all memos, and tap Done.
3.
Tap
(Menu) for the following options:
• Sort by: Set whether to sort the memo list by Date, Title, or Color.
• Send via: Select one or all memos, tap Send, and then tap
Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Messaging, or Wi-Fi to send memos
to another device or another person.
146
• Print: Select one or all memos, tap Done, and send the memos to
a Samsung printer.
• Memo sync: Sign in to Google and use Google docs to back up
your memos.
• SNS log in: Log in to your social network sites, Facebook, Twitter, or
LinkedIn.
• PIN lock: Set a PIN number to use to lock your memos.
4. Touch and hold a memo thumbnail or list entry to display
the following options:
• Delete: Delete the selected memo.
• Lock/Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN number to remove
the lock form the memo. Once you lock a memo, you have to use
your PIN number to view the memo.
• Send via: Tap Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Messaging, or Wi-Fi to
send the memo by the selected method. For more information,
refer to “Bluetooth” on page 70.
• Update SNS: Lets you post the memo to one or more of your social
network sites. Only site you are signed in to are displayed.
Messaging
Memo Options
While viewing a Memo:
䊳
Tap
(Memo options) for the following options:
Delete: Delete this Memo.
Color: Choose a color for this memo.
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from other
mobile devices.
You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create
multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile
devices.
䊳
Lock/Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN
number to remove the lock form the memo. Once
you lock a memo, you have to use your PIN
number to view the memo.
Print: Send this memo to a Samsung printer.
Update SNS: Lets you post the memo to one or
more of your social network sites. Only site you
are signed in to are displayed.
Send via: Tap Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email,
Messaging, Wi-Fi to send the memo by the
selected method.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Messaging).
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages”
on page 65.
MobileLife Organizer
Organizes your family’s calendar, family shopping list, To-Do list,
and Journal entries in one place. Key features include:
• Easily access Family Members calendar on-the-go.
• Shopping List: Create a shared grocery list to prevent over
purchasing or missed items.
• Calendar: Easily see your entire family’s calendar on one screen.
Calendar entries are available on the device and a computer.
• To Do: Create a shared To Do list for the entire family to work on
together.
• Journal: Track fun things your family does on the go and include
pictures to remember the moment.
Applications and Widgets
147
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Application Menu
(MobileLife Organizer).
Logging in to MobileLife
To use MobileLife Organizer with an existing account:
1.
From the main application screen, enter you Email address
and shared family password.
2.
Tap the Shared family password field and enter the
3.
Tap Sign in.
appropriate password.
To create a new MobileLife Organizer account:
1.
From the main application screen, tap Create an account.
2.
Enter the necessary information, such as First name, Email
address, Household name, and a Shared password.
3.
4.
148
Menu
Current screen
Create an appointment
1.
Read the terms of use and place a check mark along side
From the MobileLife main screen, locate the Application
menu and tap Calendar.
the field to confirm your acceptance of the terms.
2.
Tap
Tap Done.
3.
Select New Appointment.
(Menu) from the bottom of the screen.
4.
Enter all Appointment Details and select household
members to be included in the appointment.
• These members can be added by entering their name, Email
address, phone number, and assigning a color.
5. Tap Save.
Music
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Music).
For more information, refer to “Music App” on page 100.
Music Player
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
My Account
This option provides you with account specific information such
as your current activity, billing information, and Plan Services
information. You can also set alerts for minute or message usage,
payment reminder, or power saver.
Note: You may be prompted to log into the Android Market to receive the
latest version of the T-Mobile My Account application.
The differences between My Account and My Device are these:
• My Account: check Activity, set Alerts and Events, review Billing,
and review your current Plan and services.
• My Device: access Support, view Quick Tools, Personalize settings,
and Storage & Battery.
(Music
Player).
For more information, refer to “Music Player” on page 105.
Tip: Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(My Account).
2.
Read the on-screen information and tap OK.
The initial screen displays four tabs: Activity, Set Alerts, Billing,
and Plan.
Applications and Widgets
149
Activity
The Activity tab displays your current minute and message
activity. You can view what percentage of minutes were used as
well as the number of messages used for a particular start date.
Alerts and Events
From this screen you can activate alerts to notify you of the
following:
• Alert Settings: sets when you would receive alerts for the following:
– Minute Usage: tracks the number of minutes used and remaining in
your plan. Minute Usage Reminder: sends an alert when the number of
minutes used reaches 75 percent of the total available minutes in the
plan. Over Limit Alert: sends an alert when usage exceeds your plan’s
total available minutes.
– Message Usage: tracks the number of messages used and remaining
in your plan. If you plan includes unlimited messages this setting does
not apply.
– Data Usage: tracks data used and remaining in your plan. If you plan
includes unlimited data usage this setting does not apply.
– Payment Reminder: alerts when your bill is due.
– Power Saver: sends an alert when the battery level reaches 30
percent. The alert displays in the notification window. This alert is
automatically set to On.
– Support Alerts: allows you to enable automated troubleshooting.
• Recent Oder Status: Displays details about your recent orders.
150
• Account Events: provides details about your recent account
events.
Billing
This provides a billing summary.
Plan
This screen displays specific information and charges for your
current plan and services. The screen also displays additional
services information and charges. Included categories include:
My plan & services, Additional Services, and T-Mobile Offers.
My Device
Use the My Device application to configure device settings, view
support information, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or
Wallpapers, or view battery storage information.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(My Device).
2.
Tip: Use
Read the on-screen information and tap OK.
to toggle between My Account and My Device.
The differences between My Account and My Device are these:
• My Account: check Activity, set Alerts and Events, review Billing,
and review your current Plan and services.
• My Device: access Support, view Quick Tools, Personalize settings,
and Storage & Battery.
The initial screen displays four tabs: Personalize, Quick Tools,
Support, and Storage Battery.
Support
Displays support information such as: Device Restart, Device
Storage, My Account Feedback, T-Mobile Forums, T-Mobile on
Twitter, and T-Mobile® Tech Assist™.
Quick Tools
Quick Tools is a shortcut that allows you to view and configure
the following features and parameters: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data
Roaming, GPS, Brightness, Screen Timeout, and Phone Info.
Personalize
Using this menu you can personalize Wallpapers.
• Wallpapers: you can personalize your device’s background by
selecting wallpapers from the Shop, Gallery, Live Wallpapers, and
the Wallpaper Gallery.
Storage & Battery
From this tab you can view Memory storage information for the
device. You can also view the battery level percentage and other
information.
Navigation
Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected
turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.
Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,
dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
Important!: To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
- inside a building or between buildings
- in a tunnel or underground passage
- in poor weather
- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
- in a vehicle with tinted windows
Enabling GPS Location
1.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Settings)
➔ Location and security
2.
Tap Use wireless networks. A green check mark indicates
the GPS location feature has been enhanced by using Wi-Fi
and/or mobile networks to increase accuracy.
3.
Tap Use GPS satellites. A green check mark indicates the
GPS location feature is enabled.
Applications and Widgets
151
Navigation options
Note: You must first create a Wi-Fi connection to use Navigation.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Navigation).
The Navigation screen displays.
2.
Tap either Driving or Walking in the Application bar to
3.
Tap Map in the Application bar to see a map (Driving) or a
describe the type of directions you want.
satellite image (Walking) of your area.
4.
If Driving, tap
(Route options) to set whether directions
should Avoid highways and Avoid tolls.
152
To find a destination, tap an option:
• Speak Destination: Say the name or address of your destination.
• Type Destination: Enter the destination.
• Contacts: Choose a destination from a contact record.
• Starred Places: Choose destinations you have marked as favorites.
• Recent Destinations: Choose from recent destinations. This option
is not available until a destination has been requested.
6. While navigating, tap
(Menu) for options:
• Search: Find a location.
• Route Info/Show Map: View information about the current route or
return to the Map view.
• Layers: Choose map layers to display.
• Mute/Unmute: Mute to silence voice-guided prompts.
• Exit Navigation: Close Navigation and discard route information.
• Directions List: View directions in a step-by-step list.
• Set Destination: Choose or enter a destination.
• Help: Learn about Google maps.
• Terms, Privacy & Notices: View information about Google Maps,
including the Service Agreement and Privacy Policy, and give
Feedback.
5.
Use Google Navigation to find a destination and to get walking or
driving directions.
Pen Memo
Pen Memo List Options
Create and manage memos that you create by typing text or
writing with your finger or a stylus. You can even draw and save
pictures as a memo. You can also share your memos.
While viewing the list of Memos:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
on the
keypad to search.
(Apps) ➔
(Pen
2.
memo).
Tap
(List) to view your memos in a list mode. Touch an
entry in the list on the left to view the memo on the right of
2.
Tap
3.
Tap the Enter title field and use the keypad enter a title for
(New Memo).
the screen.
3.
the memo.
4.
(Search), use the keypad to enter
a key word or phrase to search for, and tap
Composing a Pen Memo
1.
To find a memo, tap
Tap the body of the memo and then:
• Tap
to type the memo or tap
to write or draw with your
finger or a stylus. T
• Tap
to erase writing or drawing.
• Tap
to set Brush, Color, Pen size, Eraser size, and Theme.
• Tap
to undo and
to redo writing or drawing.
5. Tap Done to save.
For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 41.
To delete one or more memos, tap
(Delete), select one
or all memos, and tap Delete.
4.
Tap
(Menu) for the following options:
• Sort by: Set whether to sort the memo list by Date, Title, Text first,
Drawing first, or Auto tag first.
• Share via: Select one or all memos, tap Share, and then tap
Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Messaging, Picasa, Social
Hub, or Wi-Fi to send memos to another device or another person.
• Export: Tap To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text), select one or
all memos, and touch Export.
• Print: Select one or all memos, tap Print, and send the memos to a
Samsung printer.
• Memo sync: Sign in to Google and use Google docs to back up
your memos.
Applications and Widgets
153
• Auto tag settings: Tap Enable auto tag to enable auto tagging of
your memos.
5. Touch and hold a memo thumbnail or list entry to display
the following options:
• Delete: Delete the selected memo.
• Export: Tap To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text), select one or
all memos, and touch Export.
• Share via: Tap Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Messaging,
Picasa, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi to send memos to another device or
another person. For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on
page 70.
Memo Options
While viewing a Memo:
1.
Tap
(Delete) to delete this memo.
2.
Tap
(Menu) for the following options:
• Share via: Tap Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Messaging,
Picasa, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi to send memos to another device or
another person.
• Export: Tap To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text) to export the
memo to the selected app.
• Set as: Use this memo as a Contact photo, a Lock Screen, or
Wallpaper image.
• Print: Send the memo to a Samsung printer.
154
3.
Tap the body of the memo to edit the memo.
Options display for editing. For more information, refer to
“Composing a Pen Memo” on page 153.
Photo Editor
The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions for
pictures that you take on your device. Along with basic image
tuning like brightness, contrast, and color it also provides a wide
variety of effects used for editing the picture.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Photo
Editor).
For more information, refer to “Photo Editor” on page 96.
Places
Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google
Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business
or person, find out more information about the business, see
coupons, public responses, and more.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a category or tap
(Apps) ➔
Add to enter criteria.
(Places).
3.
Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,
Coffee, Bars, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, Explore
Nearby, or Add your own place.) A list of places within this
category displays.
– or –
Tap
(Menu) and then tap either My Places ➔ Starred
Places.
4.
Pro Apps
Provides access to compatible productivity tools. These
productivity packs can be accessed from anywhere.
Note: Access to these applications and packs requires you have an active
Google account and are logged in prior to connection.
1.
Tap the Maps icon (upper-right) to launch the related maps
Tap
(Pro
Apps).
2.
feature.
5.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
Select an application and follow the on-screen download
and installation instructions.
(Menu) ➔ Latitude. The functions of this
application are similar to those of the Navigation
application, but work along with the Latitude service
where you can share your location with your chosen
Google friends.
Pulse
Pulse News gives you news visually in bite-sized pieces. Each
article is a small square filled with the headline and an
associated image. Pulse incorporates colorful panning story bars
and fills them with content from your favorite websites.
䊳
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Pulse).
The Pulse main menu displays.
Applications and Widgets
155
Qello
3.
Qello® brings the concert right to the fan. This is an HD
streaming rental service of the world's largest catalog of HD live
concerts.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Read the on-screen information and tap OK.
field and use the keypad to enter your E-mail address, and
then tap Register Now.
– or –
(Qello).
Tap Register Later, if you are not ready to register at this
time.
Quickoffice HD
The Quickoffice screen is displayed.
The Quickoffice HD® application allows you to create and save
Microsoft Word, Excel, and Powerpoint documents. You can also
view existing PDFs.
1.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
Use the keypad to enter your name, tap the E-mail Address
4.
Tap Local Files to display the folders and files on your
device.
– or –
(Apps) ➔
(Quickoffice HD). The Quickoffice Register your Software
Tap Recent Documents to view the documents you have
screen displays.
recently updated.
Read the on-screen information and choose to either
Register Now or Register Later.
Tip: Sweep a folder list to the left or right to display the previous or next level
of folders or files.
5.
To create a new document, tap
(New Document), tap
an option, and follow the on-screen instructions.
156
The following document types are available: Word
6.
Tap a document to open it.
– or –
Excel 97-2003 Workbook, PowerPoint Presentation, and
Touch and hold a document and drag it to one of the
PowerPoint 97-2003 Presentation.
following icons:
To find a memo, tap
(Search), use the keypad to enter
a key word or phrase to search for, and tap Go on the
keypad to search.
7.
9.
Document, Word 97-2003 Document, Excel Workbook,
To save your documents to a remote account, tap
(Add remote account), touch an account, and sign in.
Rename to: Use the keypad to rename the document
and touch Rename.
Send: Tap Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, or Wi-Fi
to send your document.
Delete: Tap OK to delete the document.
Touch Learn more about ... to read more about the selected
10. Touch and drag a document to a new folder. Tap Copy to or
account.
8.
Tap
(Menu) for these additional options:
• Create folder: Tap the New folder name field and use the keypad
to name the folder. Tap Create to add the folder to selected folder.
• Sort: Sort files or folders by Name, Type, Size, or Date.
• Updates: Check for updates for Quickoffice.
• Registration: If you touched Register Later when you signed in,
use this option and touch Register Now.
• About: Displays information about the Quickoffice app.
• Help: Displays the Quickoffice Help Guide and answers to
frequently asked questions. You can also open a support ticket.
Move to on the Action pop-up to copy or move the
document to the highlighted folder.
Applications and Widgets
157
Security
7.
This application provides mobile device-specific security features
that are coupled with a minimal performance hit. Lookout Mobile
Security provides key security options that are unique to the
mobile market. Along with the antivirus and anti-malware tech,
there's a lost and stolen device locator service, an application
privacy adviser, and a backup service.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Read the on-screen descriptions and tap Get started to
(Security).
begin your configuration.
3.
Read the on-screen information about Security and if
desired, tap the Enable Security field to activate the
feature.
4.
Tap Next.
5.
Read the on-screen information about Backup and if
help locate your missing device and if desired, tap
New user (to setup a new account) or Existing user (to log
into your account field to activate the feature).
8.
158
Tap Next.
Tap Start Lookout.
From the main application, the main features are presented as
buttons. Tap one to reveal a button that will run the feature.
Settings
Configure your device to your preferences. For more information,
refer to “Settings” on page 167.
9.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings).
SimCity Deluxe HD
SimCity® is a critically acclaimed city-building simulation video
game.
1.
desired, tap the Enable Backup field to activate the feature.
6.
Read the on-screen information about the feature that can
From a Home screen, tap
Deluxe HD).
2.
Follow the on-screen prompts
(Apps) ➔
(SimCity
Slacker
Social Hub
Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile devices.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Slacker).
Important!: You must register and create a free account prior to using this
service.
2.
Read the on-screen legal disclaimer and tap OK.
3.
If prompted, enter your Email address and password.
– or –
Access your social networks, like Facebook, Twitter, and
LinkedIn, and your email all in one place.
Allows you to easily and intuitively satisfy all of your
communication needs from within a single-user interface.
E-mails, instant messaging, social network contents, and
calendar contents from all major service providers are available.
Tip: A shortcut to Social Hub appears on the main Home screen by default.
䊳
Tap Create Account if you have not created an account.
4.
From a Home screen, tap
(Social Hub).
– or –
Begin selecting the music you want to listen to by slecting
From a Home screen, tap
from the available on-screen categories.
Hub).
(Apps) ➔
(Social
Add an Account
1.
Tap Set up now. The Add account screen displays.
2.
Tap the account you want to add and then enter the
required information, such as email address and
password.
The added account now appears on the Social Hub screen
with any other accounts.
Applications and Widgets
159
3.
Tap an account entry to start the application.
4.
If you choose an SNS account, read the SNS disclaimer,
tap the I accept all the terms above checkbox, then tap
Agree to continue.
Tap Next.
6.
Follow the on-screen instructions for adding an account.
7.
From the Social Hub main screen, tap the Feeds or
Messages tabs to see information pertaining to your
account.
Tap
T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and
Video on Demand.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(T-Mobile
TV).
5.
8.
T-Mobile TV
For more information, refer to “T-Mobile TV” on page 99.
Talk
Use Google Talk to chat with other Google Talk users. For more
information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 80.
䊳
(Social Hub) to comfirm addition.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Talk).
TegraZone Games
Tegra Zone® Games is an Android app for your NVIDIA®
Tegra™-powered mobile device, you can easily find games that
are optimized to exploit the full potential of your device’s built-in
Tegra mobile processor. Discover unique, premium games for
Android that deliver more visually-stunning graphics and
smoother gameplay, so you can get the most out of your Tegrapowered mobile device.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(TegraZone Games).
2.
160
Follow the on-screen instructions.
(Apps) ➔
Video Chat
This is a mobile video sharing and 2-way video calling service.
This application also lets you record and share experiences with
your friends, family, and your favorite social networks.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Video Chat) ➔ Sign up.
2.
Fill in the Email address, Username, and Password, then
tap Sign up to create your new account.
3.
Follow the on-screen instructions. For more information,
• Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is
embedded into your Qik videos. When posting or sharing Qik video
information with others, you can decide how accurate the related
location information can be. Choose from: Off, City level, Street
level, or Track live.
• Video recording quality allows you to assign a video quality to the
outbound video. Choose from: Low, Normal, or High.
• About displays the version information for the Qik Video Chat
application.
Recording a Video Chat
1.
visit: http://qik.com/.
To adjust application settings:
1.
Tap
and then tap Settings.
2.
Choose from any of the following options:
• Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences.
– Facebook: set up your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos.
– Twitter: set up your Twitter account sharing preferences.
– YouTube: set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos.
– People: set up your contact sharing parameters.
• Privacy allows you to select who can find you and see your videos.
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Video
Chat).
2.
Tap Record & Share.
3.
Read the one-time disclaimer describing the public nature
of your videos and tap OK.
4.
Tap Record to start recording.
– or –
Tap Stop to end the recording process.
5.
Enter a title for your video segment and select those
services you wish to use to distribute your video.
Applications and Widgets
161
6.
Services such as Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, SMS, and E-mail ask
that you select a recipient for your video segment.
Voice Search offers voice-activated Google searches.
Video
Tip: Voice Search is also available on the Google Search widget, which
appears on a Home screen by default.
View and manage videos stored on your tablet.
Tip: A shortcut to Video appears on the main Home screen by default.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
Voice Search
1.
(Video player).
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Voice Search).
(Video
2.
player).
Videos
The Videos app is a new application for select Android devices.
Any movie you rent from the Android Market can be downloaded
for offline viewing through this application. In addition, the Videos
app can be used to stream your Android Market movie rentals as
well as play any of your personal videos stored on your tablet.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
For more information tap
162
(Apps) ➔
(Menu) ➔ Help.
(Voice Search).
– or –
– or –
From a Home screen, tap
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Tap Speak now and then speak your search command
slowly and clearly. Google searches for the information and
displays results.
World Clock
View the date and time in any time zone.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(World
Clock).
A map of the world displays with the locations you have
(Videos).
added flagged.
2.
Tap
(Add) to add a city to display.
A list of world cities displays. Scroll through the list and
touch the city you want to add. A pop-up displays the city
To add the Yahoo Finance widget:
1.
name, the current time and date there, and the GMT offset.
3.
Tap
on the pop-up to add the city.
Tap
(Reorder) to change the order of the cities. Tap
the grid
on an entry and drag the entry to a new
position in the list. Tap Done to change the order.
4.
Tap
(Remove) to delete entries. Touch the box to
on the screen to display the Add to Home screen menu.
2.
Adding Your First Stock
To add your first stock:
1.
DST settings, which enable or disable Daylight Savings
2.
Type in a stock name.
3.
Tap
Stay on top of the markets with the Yahoo Finance app for
Android devices. Get real-time quotes, follow the market, or
check out a particular stock. View headline news, top stories,
and videos from Tech Ticker. Yahoo Finance lets you keep up with
the market movers from your Android device.
to start the search and touch an entry in the list
of stocks that is displayed.
Time adjustments.
Yahoo Finance
From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo Finance widget.
The Search symbols search bar displays.
appears), then tap Remove.
Touch and hold an entry to remove it or to set the
Tap Widgets ➔ Yahoo! finance.
The Yahoo Finance widget displays.
check the cities you want to delete (a green check mark
5.
Navigate to the desired Home screen, then touch and hold
4.
The Yahoo Finance widget displays with information about
the stock just added.
Applications and Widgets
163
Managing Stocks
Once you add a stock, there are additional Yahoo Finance options
you can use to add more stocks and set up how they are
displayed and refreshed.
1.
5.
6.
the exchange on which they trade.
widget. Information about the stock displays.
7.
Tap
(Refresh) to update the information.
3.
Tap
(Add) to add another stock. For more information,
refer to “Adding Your First Stock” on page 163.
4.
Tap
(Menu) to display the following options:
• Delete: Tap to delete the stock being displayed.
• Change order: Displays your stocks list. Touch and drag stocks to
change the order in which they are displayed.
• Search: Tap to search for a new stock.
• Settings: Displays the following options:
– Auto scrolling: If you have added more than one stock, the Yahoo
Finance widget displays information for each stock on a rotating basis.
– Auto refresh: Choose a time interval for automatic refreshing of stock
information. The choices are: None, Every 30 minutes, Every 1 hour,
and Every 3 hours. When the setting is None, touch the refresh icon on
the Yahoo Finance widget to update stock information.
164
Tap the Major indices tab to display the a summary of the
performance of major groupings of stocks, classified by
From a Home screen, touch an entry in the Yahoo Finance
2.
Under the My Stocks tab, touch a stock entry to display the
full stock information screen.
Tap the Currencies tab to display the currency exchange
rate for various currencies.
Additional Options
There are more options available from the full stock information
screen.
1.
From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo Finance widget.
The full stock information screen for one of your stocks
displays.
2.
If you have added more than one stock, touch either end of
the heading bar to view the previous or next stock.
3.
Near the center of the screen, touch 1d (1 day),
5d (5 days), 1m (1 month), 3m (3 months), 6m (6 months),
or 1y (1 year) to view a stock performance graph for the
requested period.
4.
Near the bottom of the screen, touch YAHOO! FINANCE to
5.
favorites, manage your playlists, and display your
Website to view more financial information.
subscriptions. To use this function, sign in to your YouTube
At the bottom of the screen, touch Quotes delayed to read about
real-time exchange quotes and access other Yahoo Finance
online options, such as Top Stories and a currency converter.
account or add and account.
6.
(YouTube).
– or –
From a Home screen, tap
(YouTube).
2.
(Search YouTube) and use the keypad to enter a
on
the keypad to initiate the search.
View and upload YouTube videos right from your device. YouTube
is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share
videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
From the Home screen, tap
Tap
keyword or phrase to find a YouTube video. Tap
YouTube
1.
Tap the Your Channel tab to upload a video, see your
link to the Yahoo! Finance website. Tap Go to Mobile
(Apps) ➔
When the screen loads you can begin searching and
7.
While browsing, tap
(Menu) for these options:
• Sign in: Sign in or add a YouTube account. You may have to sign in
to YouTube to use certain options.
• Settings: Configure display and search settings and view
information about the application.
• Help: Display YouTube help information.
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.
8. While viewing a video, tap
(Share) to share the video
viewing posted videos.
by way of Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or
3.
Tap the Home tab to return to the main YouTube page.
Wi-Fi.
4.
Tap the Browse tab to browse videos by categories like
Comedy, Education, Music, and so on. Touch the desired
category to display video thumbnails.
Applications and Widgets
165
9.
While viewing a video, tap
(Menu) for these options:
•
•
•
•
•
Favorite: Mark this video as a favorite.
Save to: Save the video.
Copy URL: Copy the URL of the video to the clipboard.
Flag: Flag the video for YouTube review.
Settings: Configure display and search settings and view
information about the application.
• Help: Display YouTube help information.
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.
To configure YouTube Settings:
䊳
Tap
(Menu) ➔ Settings and configure the following
parameters:
– General settings:
• High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile
network.
• Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on-screen
captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Extra Large.
– Search settings:
• Clear search history allows you to clear any previous YouTube
searches from appearing within the search box.
• SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.
– About settings:
• Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.
• Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
• Google Mobile Terms of Service
• YouTube Terms of Service
• Google Mobile Privacy Policy
• YouTube Privacy Policy
• Application version displays the software version for the current
YouTube application.
Zinio
Launches a digital magazine reader. Zinio has transformed your
favorite print magazines into digital format.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap sign in if you already have an account or tap create an
account to continue.
Follow the on-screen prompts.
166
(Apps) ➔
1.
(Zinio).
Section 9: Settings
This section explains Settings for customizing your device.
1.
Accessing Settings
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks.
(Apps) ➔
2.
(Settings).
Tap the Flight mode check box to enable Flight mode. A
check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Flight
– or –
mode is active.
From any screen, tap the Time in the System bar,
– or –
tap anywhere in the Status Details, and then tap
Set Flight mode using the Quick Settings menu. For more
(Settings). For more information, refer to “Quick
Settings” on page 22.
Wireless and Networks
information, refer to “Quick Settings” on page 22.
Activating Wi-Fi
1.
Control your device’s wireless connections.
Flight Mode
Flight mode allows you to use many of your tablet’s features,
such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane
or in any other area where accessing data is prohibited.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
Tap Wi-Fi. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi is
active.
Important!: When your tablet is in Flight Mode, it cannot access online
information or applications.
Settings
167
Wi-Fi settings
2.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
2.
search for other devices enabled with Wi-Fi direct
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
Tap Wi-Fi Direct. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicating it is enabled. Your phone will begin to
Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your device automatically uses
Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile device services.
connections.
3.
Configure the settings as desired.
After scan, tap a device name to begin the connection
process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
The available connection types displayed with a security type
displayed next to them. For more information about using your
device’s Wi-Fi features, see “Wi-Fi” on page 119.
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
You can configure your phone to connect directly with other Wi-Fi
capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data between
devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi direct
communication. This connection is direct and not via a hotspot or
WAP.
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and
running before it can be detected by your device.
4.
Tap Connect. The direct connection is then established.
5.
When prompted to complete the connection, tap OK. The
status field now reads “Connected” and your connected
device is listed within the Wi-Fi Direct devices listing.
Kies via Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi configuration and usage by Kies Air.
Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi network
connection.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Kies via Wi-Fi.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Wi-Fi Direct settings.
168
2.
Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.
Choose from either: Wi-Fi or Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Tethering
Bluetooth Settings
Use Bluetooth settings to manage Bluetooth connections, set
your device’s name, and control your device’s visibility.
Activating Bluetooth
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Bluetooth settings and tap
Bluetooth to turn it on.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark
indicates active). When Bluetooth is enabled, a green
check mark appears next to the field and
Note: If additional software or USB drivers are required, navigate to:
http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads.
䊳
Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.
3.
This option allows you to share your device’s mobile data
connection via a direct USB connection between your device and
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be
the Mobile AP feature.
appears on
the screen.
For more information, refer to “Bluetooth Settings” on page 116.
For more information, refer to “Tethering” on page 123.
VPN settings
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual
Private Networks (VPNs).
Important!: Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one.
Settings
169
Adding a VPN
4.
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to
use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2
Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based
L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ VPN settings.
2.
Tap Add VPN.
3.
To establish a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol):
• Tap Add PPTP VPN.
• Tap VPN name, add a name for this connection using the keypad,
then tap OK.
• Tap Set VPN server, add a name using the keypad, then tap OK.
• Tap Enable Encryption to make a check mark (if desired).
• Tap DNS search domains, add a name for DNS search using the
keypad, then tap OK.
170
To establish a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol):
• Tap Add L2TP VPN.
• Tap VPN name, add a name for this connection using the keypad,
then tap OK.
• Tap Set VPN server, add a name using the keypad, then tap OK.
• Tap Enable L2TP secret to make a check mark (if desired).
• Tap Set L2TP security and enter a password (if desired), then tap
OK.
• Tap DNS search domains, add a name for DNS search using the
keypad, then tap OK.
5. To establish a L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based
L2TP/IPSec):
• Tap Add L2TP/IPSec PSK VPN.
• Tap VPN name, add a name for this connection using the keypad,
then tap OK.
• Tap Set VPN server, add a name using the keypad, then tap OK.
• Tap Set IPsec pre-shared key, enter a key and tap OK.
• Tap Enable L2TP secret to make a check mark (if desired).
• Tap Set L2TP security and enter a password (if desired), then tap
OK.
• Tap DNS search domains, add a name for DNS search using the
keypad, then tap OK.
6.
To establish a L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/
IPSec):
Allows you to activate data usage on your device.
• Tap Add L2TP/IPSec CRT VPN.
• Tap VPN name, add a name for this connection using the keypad,
then tap OK.
• Tap Set VPN server, add a name using the keypad, then tap OK.
• Tap Enable L2TP secret to make a check mark (if desired).
• Tap Set L2TP security and enter a password (if desired), then tap
OK.
• Tap Set user certificate, then tap OK.
• Tap Set CA certificate, then tap OK.
• Tap DNS search domains, add a name for DNS search using the
keypad, then tap OK.
Mobile networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the
Mobile networks options.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
Use packet data
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔
Use packet data.
Data Roaming
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s
partner networks and access data services when you are out of
your service providers area of coverage.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2.
Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while
roaming outside your network.
– or –
Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check mark
and deactivate the feature.
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Mobile networks.
The following options display:
Settings
171
Access Point Names
Using the 4G Network
To access a wireless access point:
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔
Access Point Names. A list of the Access point names
display. The active access point displays a bright green,
To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection,
the device has an automatic detection method where it finds both
the fastest and most stable connection/communication method.
This device is capable of using either 4G/3G services for this
connection.
1.
filled circle to the right of the name.
(Apps) ➔
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔
Network Mode.
(Settings)
Network Mode.
You can configure your device to either manually detect and use
either a 2G (GSM) or 3G (WCDMA) data network connection.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔
Network mode
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap GSM/WCDMA (auto mode). A check mark displays next
to this option to indicate that it is active. This is the default
(Settings)
mode for this device.
Using the 2G (EDGE) Network
If you are not using applications that require the 3G network
speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a
browser), using the 2G network saves battery life.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and networks ➔ Mobile networks ➔
Network mode.
2.
Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option to
indicate that it is active.
172
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.
3.
4.
Using the 3G Network
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔
Network mode.
2.
Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this option
to indicate that it is active.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.
Default Setup Options
Your device default is set to Automatic (to automatically search
for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to
select a network each time you connect.
1.
Network Operators
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
Using this feature you can view the current network connection.
You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set
the network selection to Automatic.
1.
Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network
connection.
If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed,
follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network.
1.
Tap Search now to manually search for a network.
Tap Network operators. The current network connection
displays at the bottom of the list.
operators.
2.
Tap Default setup.
3.
Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually.
– or –
Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a
network.
Important!: You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an
available network.
Settings
173
Sound Settings
Adjusting the Volume Settings
From this menu you can control the sounds on the device as well
as configure the display settings.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
The Volume menu now provides access to various volume
settings within one on-screen popup menu.
(Settings)
Note: You can only set volume when Silent Mode is disabled.
➔ Sound.
1.
The following options display:
2.
When enabled, your device vibrates to alert you to new
notifications.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume
•
•
•
•
Tap Vibrate to for these settings:
• Always: The device vibrates for all notifications, regardless of other
sound settings.
• Never: No vibration is used for notifications.
• Only in Silent mode: The device vibrates for notifications when in
Silent mode.
• Only when not in Silent mode: The device vibrates for notifications
when not in Silent Mode.
174
(Apps) ➔
settings for any of the following volume levels.
(Settings)
➔ Sound.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
(Settings)➔ Sound ➔ Volume.
Vibrate Mode
Notification: Sounds for alerts to new messages and other events.
Media: Sounds made by music apps, video apps, and so on.
Alarm: Notifications for alarms set in the Alarm app.
System: Application sounds and other sounds made by your
device.
Tip: You can also set System volume from the Home screen by pressing the
Volume Key.
3.
Tap OK to save your setting.
Setting a Notification Ringtone
Select a default ringtone for message, alarm, and other
notifications.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Screen Lock Sounds
When enabled, tones play when unlocking and locking the
screen.
(Settings)
1.
➔ Sound ➔ Notification ringtone.
Tap a ringtone to hear a sample and select it.
3.
Tap OK to save the setting.
2.
Tap Screen lock sounds to enable or disable tones. When
Haptic Feedback and Vibration Intensity
The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used
when you use the dialing pad or making a screen selection. Each
time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone
sounds.
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
Instead of sounding a tone, the Haptic feedback option vibrates
when you press keys on certain screens. You can also set the
intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting.
1.
Tap Audible selection to enable or disable tones. When
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Sound.
➔ Sound.
2.
(Settings)
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Audible Selection
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
➔ Sound.
2.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
Tap Haptic feedback to enable or disable vibration. When
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
3.
Tap Vibration intensity then touch and drag the slider to
adjust the vibration intensity, then tap OK.
4.
Tap OK to save your setting.
Settings
175
Screen Settings
2.
Brightness
The Select wallpaper from pop-up displays. Tap Gallery,
Live Wallpapers, or Wallpapers. For more information, refer
Set the default screen brightness.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
3.
to “Wallpapers” on page 39.
(Settings)
3.
➔ Screen ➔ Brightness.
2.
Tap Wallpaper gallery to select a wallpaper or tap Gallery to
select one of your photos. Tap the album to display the
Tap OK to save the setting.
photos. Tap a photo to select it, then crop and resize the
picture, if desired. Tap Ok to save the picture as wallpaper.
Tap X to cancel.
Font Style
Mode
Set the font for screen displays.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Screen ➔ Screen display.
2.
Tap Font style to choose a font style or tap Get fonts online
Set the screen mode. This helps you better adjust the on-screen
representation of colors.
1.
2.
Set the Home screen and Lock screen wallpaper.
From a Home screen, tap
➔ Screen ➔ Screen display.
176
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
➔ Screen ➔ Mode.
to browse and download a new font.
Home Screen and Lock Screen
1.
Under Lock screen, tap Wallpaper.
Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or tap
Automatic brightness.
Screen Display
1.
Under Home screen, tap Wallpaper.
Tap Dynamic, Standard, or Movie then tap OK.
(Settings)
Auto-Rotate Screen
Auto Adjust Screen Power
When this option is checked, the screen orientation changes
when you rotate the device. When this option is not checked, the
screen orientation locks in the current orientation (landscape or
portrait) and the orientation does not change when you rotate the
device.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Screen.
2.
Tap Auto-rotate screen to enable or disable the auto-rotate
feature.
Animation
When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the screen
and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
2.
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
2.
(Settings)
Tap Auto adjust screen power to enable or disable the
mode. When enabled, a check appears in the check box.
Horizontal Calibration
Horizontal calibration allows you to horizontally calibrate your
display using the accelerometer.
1.
➔ Screen ➔ Animation.
(Apps) ➔
➔ Screen.
Set the level of animations for transitions between screens.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Screen ➔ Horizontal calibration.
2.
Place your device on a level surface and tap Calibrate. The
device adjusts the level of the accelerometer. During the
Tap No animations, Some animations, or All animations.
Timeout
calibration process a green circle appears on-screen and
the center circle adjusts to the center position.
Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen tap
and the automatic screen timeout (dim and lock).
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Screen ➔ Timeout.
2.
Tap a setting to select it.
Settings
177
Power Saving Mode
When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the screen
and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power. This
feature allows you both automatically set the device to use a
power saving mode and configure additional power saving
options manually, all in an effort to conserve battery power.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Screen ➔ Power saving mode.
2.
Tap Use Power saving mode to enable or disable the mode.
When enabled, a check appears in the check box.
3.
Confirm
appears at the top of the screen. This
indicates the power saving mode is active.
To automatically enable power saving options:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Screen ➔ Power saving mode.
2.
3.
Tap Use Power saving mode to enable this feature when the
battery level is low.
Tap Power saving mode on to assign the “battery low” level
at which the power saving mode is activated. It is at this
level that the automatic power saving function will “kick
in”.
178
4.
Refine you settings by checking options listed under Power
saving mode settings. Check the appropriate box to turn off
Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, or Sync.
5.
Tap OK to store the new battery level.
To activate additional power saving features:
1.
Activate Power saving mode.
2.
Verify Use Power saving mode is active.
3.
Tap any of the available fields to activate additional power
saving parameters. Choose from:
• Turn Off Wi-Fi to disable Wi-Fi when it is not connected to an AP.
• Turn Off Bluetooth to disable Bluetooth when not in use or actively
transmitting data.
• Turn Off GPS to disable the GPS location system when not in use.
• Turn off Sync to disable the feature when the device is not
synchronizing with the server.
• Brightness to activate or deactivate the ability to set the brightness
level.
• Brightness to adjust the brightness value of the screen. For more
information, refer to “Brightness” on page 176.
• Timeout to adjust the time delay before the screen turns off.
• Power saving tips to display additional on-screen power saving
information.
Location and Security
Use Location for Google Search
You value your privacy. So, by default, your device only acquires
your location when you dial 911. To use Location-Based
Services, you must first enable location services on your device.
My Location
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use
wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Location and security.
2.
(Settings)
Tap Use location for Google Search to use your location to
Lock Screen
Configure Lock Screen
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more information
about using the lock and unlock features, see “Securing Your
Device” on page 12.
(Apps) ➔
Tap Use GPS satellites enable the GPS satellite.
(Settings)
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Location and security.
2.
➔ Location and security.
2.
2.
1.
Enabling GPS Satellites
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
➔ Location and security.
Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information
using the wireless network.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
improve Google Search results and other Google services.
Using Wireless Networks
1.
1.
Tap Configure lock screen for these settings:
• Off: Never lock the screen.
• Unsecure: Enable the lock screen, but no pattern, PIN, or password
is required. For more information, refer to “Unlocking the
Device” on page 12.
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create and
use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or change
your screen unlock pattern.
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
Settings
179
Setting an Unlock Pattern
5.
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the
device. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will
draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to
unlock the device’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate
the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback
while drawing the pattern.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Location and security ➔ Configure lock screen ➔
Pattern.
2.
Read the instructions then tap Next.
3.
Review the onscreen animation procedure for drawing a
pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern.
4.
Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point.
Then, without removing your finger from the screen, drag
your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line
overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green
circle.
180
horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the
screen and tap Continue.
6.
Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping
Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.
Owner Information
This option is available only if you set Configure lock screen to
display the lock screen (any setting other than Off).
Note: Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.
1.
When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,
Use this option to enable or disable whether to show owner
information on the lock screen.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
➔ Location and security.
(Settings)
2.
Tap Owner information and then tap Show owner info on lock
screen to enable or disable the option.
3.
Tap the text field and use the keyboard to enter the text to
display on the lock screen.
Encryption
To change an existing SIM Card PIN:
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your tablet each
time you power it on.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
1.
Tap Change SIM PIN.
2.
Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK.
3.
Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
4.
Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
➔ Location and security.
2.
Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the
displayed help screen.
Visible Passwords
Tip: Make sure your battery is full charged. Encryption takes an hour or
more.
Setting up SIM Card Lock
Prevent another user from using your SIM card from accessing
information stored on your SIM card by protecting the information
using a PIN code.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
Passwords
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Location and security.
2.
Tap Set up SIM card lock.
3.
Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap OK.
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you tap
them while entering passwords.
From a Home screen, tap
➔ Location and security.
2.
Tap Visible passwords to enable or disable brief displays of
password characters. When enabled, a check mark
appears in the check box.
(Settings)
Device Administration
Add or remove device administrators.
1.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN
code.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Location and security.
2.
Tap Device administrators.
Settings
181
Credential Storage
Clear Storage
Use Secure Credentials
Clear stored credentials and reset the password.
This feature is not available for your device.
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted certificates.
Install from USB Storage
Install encrypted certificates from a storage device, such as a PC,
with the USB cable.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Location and security.
2.
Tap Install from USB storage, then choose a certificate and
Set or change a password to protect credentials.
(Apps) ➔
➔ Location and security.
2.
182
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Location and security.
2.
Tap Clear storage to clear stored credentials and reset the
Tap Set password, then follow the prompts.
Applications
You can download and install applications from Android Market
or create applications using the Android SDK and install them on
your device. Use Applications settings to manage applications.
Set Password
From a Home screen, tap
From a Home screen, tap
password.
follow the prompts to install.
1.
1.
(Settings)
Warning!: Because this device can be configured with system software not
provided by or supported by Google or any other company,
end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
Manage Applications
Memory Usage
Manage and remove applications from your device.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
1.
➔ Applications ➔ Manage applications.
2.
See how memory is being used by Downloaded, All, or Running
applications.
Tap an application to view and update information about
the application, including memory usage, default settings,
and permissions.
For more information, refer to “Uninstalling an App” on
page 126.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications ➔ Memory usage.
2.
Tap Downloaded, All, or Running to display memory usage
for that category of applications.
Battery Use
See how the battery is being used by device activities.
Running Services
1.
View and control services running on your device.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications.
Warning!: Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services may have
undesirable consequences on the application or Android System.
2.
Tap Battery use to view how the display, the Android
system, and Wi-Fi are affecting battery use.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
➔ Applications ➔ Running services.
(Settings)
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery use.
To stop a service:
1.
2.
Tap the service.
Tap Stop.
The Stop system service? pop-up displays.
3.
Tap OK.
Settings
183
Unknown Sources
USB Debugging
Before you can download a web application you must enable the
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can
use this option to install non-Market applications.
Enable or disable installation of non-Market applications.
Note: If you are notified that you can not download a Market application
because it comes from an “Unknown source”, enabling this option
corrects this issue.
When enabled, allows debugging when the device is attached to
a PC by a USB cable.
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications.
2.
Tap Unknown sources ➔ OK to allow installation of
non-Market applications.
Warning!: Enabling this option causes your tablet and personal data to be
more vulnerable to attack by applications from unknown sources.
Development
Set options for application development.
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications ➔ Development.
2.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
Tap USB debugging to enable or disable the setting. When
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Stay Awake
When enabled, the screen does not go to sleep (lock) while
connected to a PC with a USB cable. This can be useful when
using some applications because the device disconnects a Wi-Fi
connection when the screen locks.
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications ➔ Development.
2.
Tap Stay awake to enable or disable the setting. When
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
184
Allow Mock Locations
5.
This setting is used by developers when developing locationbased applications.
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications ➔ Development.
2.
Tap Allow mock locations to enable or disable the setting.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the box.
Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then
tap OK.
Accounts and Sync
Set up and manage accounts, including your Google and Backup
Assistant accounts. Your device provides the ability to
synchronize data from a variety of different sources or sites.
These accounts can range from Google, a Corporate Microsoft
Exchange Email Server, and other social sites such as Facebook,
Twitter, and MySpace. Corporate and Google accounts provide
the ability to synchronize Calendar events and Contacts.
General Sync Settings
Uninstalling Third-party Applications
Background Data
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this
feature.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Applications ➔ Manage applications.
2.
Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired
application.
3.
Important!: Disabling background data can extend battery life and lower data
use. Some applications may still use the background data
connection, even if this setting is disabled.
1.
Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application
info page).
4.
When enabled, all accounts can sync, send, and receive data at
any time, in the background.
At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
2.
Tap Background data to enable or disable the setting. When
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Settings
185
Auto-Sync
For more information about accounts, see “Setting Up Your
When enabled, all accounts sync data at any time, automatically.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
2.
Accounts” on page 53.
Adding an Account
1.
Tap Auto-sync to enable or disable the setting. When
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. This
feature enables the synchronization of data between your
device and external sites or servers.
• The three main components are Contacts Email, and Calendar
Events. Before these can be synchronized, they must be added to
the managed accounts list.
Manage Accounts
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
2.
Tap
3.
Tap one of the account types.
(Add account).
4.
Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
Tip: For more information about adding accounts, see “Setting Up Your
Accounts” on page 53.
Use Manage accounts to set up and configure your accounts.
Removing an Account
Note: Available settings depend on the type of account. Not all settings are
available for all accounts.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
2.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
➔ Accounts and sync.
Under Manage accounts, tap the account to modify its
settings.
186
Important!: Removing an account also deletes all of its messages, contacts
and other data from the device.
2.
Tap an account to display its settings.
(Settings)
3.
Tap
(Remove account), then tap Remove account at the
prompt to remove the account and delete all its messages,
contacts, and other data.
Account Settings
From a Home screen, tap
By default, there are no accounts managed by the device. These
must be manually added.
To manage an existing Google account:
1.
To view the account settings for an account:
1.
Synchronizing a Google Account
(Apps) ➔
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
➔ Accounts and sync.
2.
Tap Add account ➔ Google Accounts.
2.
Tap an account to display its sync settings.
3.
Tap Next ➔ Sign in.
3.
If available on your account, tap Settings.
Note: Some account types, such as Gmail, do not provide access to its
account settings via this menu.
For more information, refer to “Gmail Account Settings” on
page 72.
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
(Settings)
Note: If you do not already have a Google account, tap Create and follow the
on-screen prompts to create your new account.
4.
Tap the Username (@gmail.com) and Password fields and
enter your information.
5.
Tap Sign in. Your device then communicates with the
Google servers to confirm your information. Your existing
Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts
area of the screen.
• Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then
automatically updated to your device.
Settings
187
Synchronizing Your Corporate Account
To configure the Google management settings:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
2.
Tap
within the Google account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
3.
Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync Books,
Sync Calendar, Sync Contacts, or Sync Gmail). A green
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
4.
Tap
By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by
the device. These must be manually added.
Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is automatically added as
a managed account.
Use the following procedure to configure your device to
synchronize with a corporate email account.
1.
For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts” on
page 64.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accounts and sync.
to return to the previous screen.
2.
Locate the email account containing the events you wish to
synchronize.
3.
Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4.
Toggle the check mark adjacent to either the Sync Calendar
or Sync Contacts fields to manually sync the account.
For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts” on
page 64.
188
Motion Settings
Privacy
It is possible to control certain aspects of your tablet by simply
tilting it. You can tilt your tablet to reduce or enlarge the screen.
You can move an icon from one Home page to another by
panning your device to the left or right while holding the icon.
To activate motion:
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Motion settings ➔ Motion activation.
To activate different motion functions:
1.
Activate the motion feature.
• Tilt: Tap Use tilt to activate the tilt option and then tap Sensitivity to
set the sensitivity by dragging the slider between Slow and Fast.
Tap Try to test your setting.
• Panning: Tap Use panning to activate the panning option and then
tap Sensitivity to set the sensitivity by dragging the slider between
Slow and Fast. Tap Try to test your setting.
Manage your device’s use of personal information.
Backup and Restore
Back Up My Data
Enable or disable backup of your information to the Google
server.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Privacy.
2.
Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings to
the Google server.
Settings
189
Prior to doing a Factory Reset
Backup Account
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the Backup
account option is available.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
To export a Contact list to your SIM card:
➔ Privacy.
2.
Before using Kies air to upgrade your device or initiating a factory
reset, it is recommended that you backup your personal data
prior to use.
Tap Backup account and tap Add account to set you Google
1.
Gmail account to be backed up to the Google server.
Automatic Restore
When enabled, backed-up settings are restored when you
reinstall an application.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
restoration of settings from the Google server.
190
(Menu) ➔ Import/Export ➔ Export to SIM card.
Tap
3.
Tap Select all to choose all current device contact entries.
– or –
(Settings)
Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic
(Apps) ➔
2.
Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark
➔ Privacy.
2.
From a Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
indicates a selection.
4.
Tap Copy or Move. The name and device number for the
selected contact is then copied to the SIM.
Language and Input
Factory Data Reset
Use Factory data reset to return your device to its factory
defaults. This setting erases all data from the device, including
Google or other email account settings, system and application
data and settings, and downloaded applications, as well as your
music, photos, videos, and other files. If you reset the tablet in
this way, the next time you turn on your tablet you are prompted
to reenter the same kind of information as when you first started
Android.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Privacy.
2.
Tap Factory data reset, then follow the prompts to perform
the reset.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Language and input ➔ Select language.
2.
Tap a language/locale from the list.
Voice Input and Output
Use Voice input and output settings to customize your device’s
voice recognition feature and audible readout of text, for
example, the contents of email messages.
Voice Recognition Settings
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Language and input ➔ Voice recognition settings to
Use this option to view device memory usage.
From a Home screen, tap
Set the language used by your device.
1.
Storage
䊳
Select Language
(Apps) ➔
configure:
(Settings)
➔ Storage.
Total device memory, memory used for applications,
downloads, pictures, videos, audio, and miscellaneous
files, and available memory are displayed.
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.
• SafeSearch: Set the sensitivity for filtering of explicit images from
the results of your voice-input Google searches.
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of recognized
offensive words from the results of your voice-input Google
searches.
Settings
191
Text-to-Speech Settings
Voice output provides audible readout of text, for example, the
contents of email messages.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔Language and input ➔ Text-to-speech settings to
configure:
• Listen to example: Play a sample of speech synthesis (available if
voice data is installed).
• Always use my settings: When enabled, settings you make
override the application’s default settings.
Default settings: Configure settings to your preferences.
When Always use my settings is enabled, these settings
• Samsung TTS: Set Default settings ➔ Default engine to
Samsung TTS. Tap Voice effects to apply the various voice effects
for the spoken text. Options are: Normal, deep, high, thin, thick, and
robot voice, and, just for fun, the helium gas effect.
• Pico TTS: Install text-to-speech engine applications.
Keyboard Settings
Configure text entry options to your preferences.
Current Input Method
Choose the default text entry method.
1.
engine(s).
192
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Language and input ➔ Current input method.
2.
override the application’s default settings.
• Default engine: Choose the default text-to-speech engine
application.
• Install voice data: Download and install the speech synthesis data
needed to activate Text-to-speech from Android Market (free).
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.
• Language: Set the language voice for spoken text.
Engines: Configure settings for installed voice recognition
From a Home screen, tap
Tap English (US) Keyboard, English Voice, Samsung keypad,
or Swype to set the default method.
Input Method Selector
Set whether you want the Input Selector button to appear in the
System bar to the left of the time.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Language and input ➔ Input method selector.
2.
Tap Automatic, Always show, or Always hide to enable or
disable the setting you want.
Configure Input Methods
Swype Advanced settings
• Word suggestion: When enabled, suggests possible matching
words as you enter text.
• Auto-spacing: When enabled, inserts spaces automatically when
you pause entering text.
• Auto-capitalization: When enabled, automatically capitalizes the
first letter of the first word in a sentence.
• Show complete trace: When enabled, briefly display the Swype
trace.
• Speed vs. accuracy: Send the sensitivity of Swype text recognition.
• Personal dictionary: Manage your personal dictionary.
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: Allows you to reset the device’s Swype
dictionary.
This screen lists settings for the input methods you have
installed. For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on
page 41.
䊳
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Language and input ➔ Configure input methods.
Swype Settings
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Language and input ➔ Current input method.
2.
Under Swype, tap Settings to display a screen where you
can tap items to configure the Swype settings. Settings
include:
• Language: Allows you to select the languages available from the
Swype keyboard. To choose the desired language, tap the language
key
.
• Audio Feedback: When enabled, plays sounds as you enter text.
• Vibrate on keypress: When enabled, the device vibrates on text
entry.
• Show tips: When enabled, the device displays on-screen tips.
Swype Help settings
Help settings provide access to Swype help operation
parameters.
• Swype help: displays the on-screen Swype User Manual.
• Tutorial: provides an on-screen tutorial that shows you how to input
text faster in Swype input mode.
About
• Provides information about the current Swype
application version.
Settings
193
Android Keyboard Settings
1.
From a Home screen, tap
Samsung Keypad Settings
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
1.
➔ Language and input ➔ Current input method.
2.
Under Android keyboard, tap Active input methods to
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Language and input ➔ Current input method.
2.
Under Samsung keypad, tap Settings to display the
display a screen where you can check the languages you
following options:
want available for typing and speaking when using the
• Input language: Used to set a default text entry language. Tap this
field, scroll through the options, and tap the desired input language.
When activated, a check appears in the box.
• XT9: Enable or disable XT9 predictive text. When enabled the
system suggests words matching your text entries, and, optionally,
completes common words automatically.
• XT9 advanced settings: When XT9 is enabled, tap this field to set
the following options:
– Word completion: Enable or disable automatic word completion for
words matching your text entries.
– Word completion point: Choose the number of letters for the system
to use to predict words for automatic completion.
– Spell correction: Enable or disable automatic spell checking and
correction.
– Next word prediction: When enabled, the system predicts the next
word based on common usage patterns.
– Auto-substitution: When enabled, the system automatically replaces
words you enter with words from the XT9 auto-substitution list.
– Regional correction: When enabled, the system automatically
changes the spelling of words based on norms for your locale.
on-screen keyboard and voice input.
3.
Tap
4.
Under Android keyboard, tap Settings to display the
to return to the Configure input methods screen.
following options:
• Auto-capitalization: Check to have the on-screen keyboard
automatically capitalize the first letter of the first word after a period,
the first word in a text field, and each word in name fields.
• Vibrate on keypress: Check to vibrate each time you tap a key on
the on-screen keyboard.
• Sound on keypress: Check to play a brief sound each time you tap
a key on the on-screen keyboard.
• Auto-correction: Check to automatically enter a suggested word,
highlighted in the strip above the keyboard, when you enter a space
or punctuation.
• Show correction suggestions: Check to show suggested words in
a strip above the on-screen keyboard as you type.
194
From a Home screen, tap
– Recapture: When enabled, the system re-displays matching words
when you make corrections to a word inserted by the system.
– XT9 my words: Add words to your XT9 predictive text dictionary.
– XT9 auto-substitution: Manage the list of words the system uses for
auto-substitution (Auto-substitution setting must be enabled).
• Automatic full stop: Enable or disable automatic insertion of a “full
stop” (period and space to end a sentence) by tapping the space
bar twice.
• Auto-capitalization: Enable or disable auto-capitalization. When
enabled, the system automatically capitalizes words in your text
based on common usage, such as at the beginning of sentences.
• Voice input: Enable or disable the Voice input feature. When
enabled, you can choose to enter text by speaking the words, using
Google’s networked speech recognition feature.
• Sound on keypress: Check to play a brief sound each time you tap
an on-screen keyboard key.
• Tutorial: Displays help for using Samsung keypad and XT9
predictive text.
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features to make using the
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use the
Accessibility settings to activate these services.
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Android Market and
manage their use here.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
➔ Accessibility.
(Settings)
2.
Tap Accessibility to activate or deactivate accessibility
services. When activated, a check mark appears in the
box.
3.
If prompted, tap OK to download a screen reader from the
Android market
Accessibility Applications
Enable or disable accessibility services.
Note: You must activate Accessibility before enabling services.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accessibility.
2. Tap a service to enable or disable the service. When
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
1.
Settings
195
Accessibility Scripts
2.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ Accessibility.
2. Tap Download accessibility scripts to enable or disable the
option.
1.
Touch Screen Controls
Use this option to set the delay time for touch and hold.
(Apps) ➔
1.
From a Home screen, tap
➔ Accessibility.
2.
Tap Tap and hold delay and then select from Short, Medium,
or Long.
(Settings)
Date and Time
By default, your device receives date and time information from
the wireless network. When you are outside network coverage,
you may want to set date and time information manually using
the Date & time settings.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
➔ Date and time.
196
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
Tap a setting to configure:
• Automatic date and time: obtains all date and time information
from the network. When enabled all reamining fields are not
accessible.
• Set date: Enter the current date (only available when the Automatic
setting is disabled).
• Set time: Enter the current time (only available when the Automatic
setting is disabled).
• Select time zone: Choose your local time zone (only available when
the Automatic setting is disabled).
• Use 24-hour format: Set the format for time displays.
• Select date format: Set the format for date displays.
Use this option to allow or disallow applications to download
accessibility scripts from Google.
About Device
View information about your device, including status, legal
information, hardware and software versions, and battery use.
To access tablet information:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ About device.
2.
Tap items to view details:
• Software update: Connect to the network and download new
software. For more information, refer to “Software Update” on
page 197.
• Status: View Battery status, Battery level, MDN, Network, Signal
strength, Mobile network type, Service state, Roaming, Mobile
network state, IMEI, IMEI SV, IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address,
Bluetooth address, Serial number, and Up time.
• Battery use: View the approximate reamining battery life.
• Legal Information: Display License settings, Open source
licences and Google legal information.
Tip: To find your device’s DivX® registration code and information about
registering your device to play DivX protected video, tap License settings
➔DivX® VOD.
• Model number: Display your device’s model number.
• Android version: Display the firmware version of your device.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this
device.
• Kernel version: Display the kernel version of your device.
• Build number: Display your device’s build number.
Software Update
The Software Update feature enables you to use your device to
connect to the network and download any new software directly
to your device. The device automatically updates with the latest
available software when you access this option.
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ About device ➔ Software update.
Note: You will need to have a Samsung account to proceed with the update
process.
System Updates
The System Updates feature enables you to use your device to
connect to the network and download any new software directly
to your device. Once you have signed into your Samsung
account, the device can automatically provide you with the latest
available software when you access this option.
Note: To receive system updates, you must have an active Samsung account
and be logged in prior to use.
Settings
197
Signing In to your Samsung Account
Before you can check for system updates, you must sign in to
your Samsung account:
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ About device.
Tip: The password is for your Samsung account, not the password you use
for the email address you are entering. Plus, you can use only letters,
numbers, !, @, $, %, &, ^, and * for your Samsung account password.
System Updates Options
Once you have signed into your Samsung account, you can
check for system updates.
2.
Tap Software update. The Samsung account Term and
3.
Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap the I accept all the
4.
Tap Accept to continue or tap Reject to return to the
The following options display:
previous screen.
• Update: Tap this option to check for a software update. The
Software update pop-up displays. Tap OK. The device automatically
updates the software, if available. Otherwise, when the No update
available prompt displays, tap OK.
• Auto update: Enable this option to allow your device to
automatically check for updates monthly.
• Wi-Fi only: Enable this option to only download available updates
via an active Wi-Fi connection. If disabled, the device will begin
available downloads via its T-Mobile connection.
• Push message: Enable this option to receive software update
notifications via an SMS message.
conditions screen displays.
terms above field.
The Samsung account screen displays.
5.
If you have no Samsung account, tap Sign up, use the
keyboard to enter the required information, and tap
Sign up.
– or –
If you do have a Samsung account, tap Sign in, use the
keyboard to enter the required information, and tap Sign in.
198
1.
From a Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Settings)
➔ About device.
2.
Tap System updates.
Section 10: Health and Safety Information
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using
your Galaxy Tab. The terms “GALAXY” or “mobile device” are
used in this section to refer to your Galaxy Tab. Read this
information before using your GALAXY.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals
Although GALAXY is not a cell phone, it can operate on the same
network as cell phones and can use the same Radio Frequency
(RF) signals to communicate with the network as a cell phone.
Therefore, although the following information refers specifically
to RF exposure from wireless phones, it may apply similarly to
GALAXY when it is being used on a cell phone network.
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the
following information:
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause
cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific
evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.
looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy
emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported
biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have
failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have
failed to show an association between exposure to radio
frequency from a cell phone and health problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially
reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high
levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),
exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects
causes no known adverse health effects.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in
X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization
is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal
locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage
biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over
the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies
Health and Safety Information
199
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore,
RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of nonionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat),
and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low
frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood
flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between RF
and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,
attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have
shown a connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and
adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has
supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge.
Some of these studies are described below.
200
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to determine
whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A
report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology
(June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000
people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar
number of healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain
cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain
cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use
of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every
day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in
brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and
errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data.
Additional information about Interphone can be found at
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not
answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research
is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to
monitor developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring
of a large group of people to determine if there are any health
issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy
from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow
approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to
30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be
found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields
in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship
between exposure to radio frequency energy from
communication technologies including cell phones and brain
cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center
study involving 14 European and non-European countries.
Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program
of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for
brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use
has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987
and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did
not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/.
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a
number of steps, including the following:
• Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for
the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
• Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the
user; and
• Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to Radio Frequency (RF)
energy from cell phones — and at this point we do not know that
there is — it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned
about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple
steps to minimize your RF exposure.
• Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
Health and Safety Information
201
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your
head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and
various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and
holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy
absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone
is held away from the head in the user’s hand or in approved
body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are
required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when
used against the head and against the body.
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free
kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience
and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you
want to use your phone while driving.
202
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF
Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories
which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce
risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF
absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies
have shown that these products generally do not work as
advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields”
may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may
be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an
increase in RF absorption.
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of
cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers.
The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to
children and teenagers as well.
• Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the
head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at
all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom
made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report,
a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that
using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their
recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any
health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various
sources can be obtained from the following organizations
(updated 10/1/2010):
• FCC RF Safety Program: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
Note: This web address is case sensitive.
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
• World Health Organization (WHO): http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
• Health Protection Agency: http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
• US Food and Drug Administration: http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-
EmittingProducts/RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information
Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for
Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific
and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and
academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature
related to the biological effects of RF energy.
The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile devices
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of
absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of
watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless devices to
comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
Health and Safety Information
203
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of
safety to give additional protection to the public and to account
for any variations in measurements.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the mobile device transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power
level, the actual SAR level of the mobile device while operating
can be well below the maximum value. This is because the
mobile device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so
as to use only the power required to reach the network. In
general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna,
the lower the power output.
Before a new model mobile device is available for sale to the
public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not
exceed the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
model of a device are performed in positions and locations (e.g.
near the body) as required by the FCC.
For typical operations, this mobile device has been tested and
meets FCC RF exposure guidelines.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF
exposure guidelines.
204
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile
device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values
for this model device as reported in the FCC equipment
authorization grant are:
Cellular/PCS WCDMA/GSM/EDGE and AWS WCDMA
• Body: 1.18 W/Kg.
• Simultaneous Transmission: 1.58 W/kg.
WLAN
• Body: 1.12 W/Kg.
• Simultaneous Transmission: 1.58 W/kg
SAR information on this and other model devices can be viewed
online at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea. To find information that
pertains to this particular model GALAXY, this site uses the FCC ID
number, which is printed on the rear case of your GALAXY.
Follow the instructions on the website and it should provide
values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular mobile device.
Additional product specific SAR information can also be obtained
at http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/sar.
Smart Practices While Driving
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of
his or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be
performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to
passengers, or using a mobile device — unless the driver has
assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the
secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.
Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which
may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so
absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act
of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting
responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to
understand and address distractions.
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an
automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the
automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an
automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result
in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver’s clear view of the street and traffic.
Never use wireless data services such as Web browsing or e-mail
while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games
while operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org.
Battery Use and Safety
The battery in GALAXY is not intended to be replaced by the
consumer. If you believe the battery is damaged or needs to be
replaced, take the GALAXY to a service center for inspection and
replacement.
• Do not let the GALAXY or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the GALAXY’s circuits, leading to corrosion. Even
when the GALAXY appears to be dry and appears to operate normally,
the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the
GALAXY and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service
provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working
properly.
Health and Safety Information
205
• Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive
• Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Some websites
heating can damage the GALAXY or the battery and could cause the
GALAXY or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your GALAXY in your car in high
temperatures.
• Do not dispose of the GALAXY or the battery in a fire. The GALAXY
or the battery may explode when overheated.
• Avoid dropping the GALAXY. Dropping the GALAXY, especially on a
hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the GALAXY. If you
suspect damage to the GALAXY or battery, take it to a service center
for inspection.
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers
and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit
batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase manufacturer or
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact the
manufacturer of the battery or charger.
• Misuse or use of incompatible batteries and charging devices
could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of
fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries, damages to
your phone, or other serious hazard.
Important!: Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your battery
only with Samsung-approved chargers which are specifically
designed for your GALAXY.
WARNING!
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a
risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. Samsung’s
warranty does not cover damage to the GALAXY caused by
non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.
206
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories, and other unwanted electronics, in
accordance with local regulations and through an approved
recycler.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only
important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must
be recycled or disposed of properly.
For more information about recycling your GALAXY, go to:
http://mobile.samsungusa.com/recycling/index.jsp or call
1-800-822-8837 for more information.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect or call 1-877-278-0799.
Warning!: Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this mobile device has met applicable UL
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety
instructions per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
Display / Touch-Screen
Please note the following information when using your mobile
device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or
if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is
broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you.
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
MOBILE DEVICE
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please
INSTRUCTIONS.
note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF
THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER
OUTLET.
from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the
touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface
and void the warranty. For more information, refer to
“Standard Limited Warranty” on page 214.
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY
ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR
MOUNT POSITION.
Health and Safety Information
207
GPS
GALAXY can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for
location-based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled by
the U.S. Government that are subject to changes implemented in
accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008
Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the
performance of location-based technology on your mobile device.
Your Location
Location-based information includes information that can be
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device.
Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network
transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use
applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving
directions), such applications transmit location-based
information. The location-based information may be shared with
third-parties, including your wireless service provider,
applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties
providing services.
208
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do
change over time. In some areas, complete information may not
be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact
safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
Emergency Communication
GALAXY should not be relied upon for essential communications
(medical emergencies, calls to 911, or communications to
emergency services). GALAXY is not designed or intended to be
used for such communications. Voice Over Internet Protocol
(VOIP) services which may be used on GALAXY to make phone
calls do not support 911 calls and are only intended for talking
with friends.
Care and Maintenance
Cleaning solutions
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions
below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you
to enjoy this product for many years:
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to
clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in
a mild soap-and-water solution.
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling can
break internal circuit boards.
Liquids of any kind
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids contain
minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the mobile device does
get wet, do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave,
or dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and could cause
a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand.
Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile
device.
Extreme heat or cold
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing so
may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Shock or vibration
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s moving
parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation.
Responsible Listening
Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is
played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to
loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of
preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that
using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and
cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead
to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or
other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also
Health and Safety Information
209
been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the
ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing
problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a
portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the
sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As
a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for
everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and
equipment.
You should follow some common sense recommendations when
using any portable audio device:
• Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an
audio source.
• Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at
which you can hear adequately.
• Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not
realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.
• When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear
what you are listening to.
• Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling
210
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than
when using earbuds.
• Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time
is required before you hearing could be affected.
• Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such
as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.
• Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience
any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio
device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet: http://www.audiology.org/Pages/default.aspx
National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W.
Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area,
and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger.
When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another
device, read its user’s guide for detailed safety instructions. Do
not connect incompatible products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment
may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless
mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable
medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
• Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from
their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;
• Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
• Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason
to suspect that interference is taking place;
Health and Safety Information
211
• Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your
implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using
your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device,
consult your health care provider. For more information see:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html#.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to
assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile
device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in
these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care
facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to
external RF energy.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the
manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before
using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also
consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added
to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices
require you to do so.
212
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially
explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks
in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily
injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile
device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are
reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio
equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),
chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not
always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,
chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal
powders, and any other area where you would normally be
advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with
it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the
mobile device, or use services that increase your mobile device
bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of
the reach of small children.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you
to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be
eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection
Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the
National Fire Protection Association.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly
approved in this document could void your warranty for this
equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.
Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of
any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the
mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a
defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite
sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.
Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information
• Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device. Faulty
service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable
to the device.
• Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment used in your
vehicle are securely mounted.
• Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials
in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or
accessories.
• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including portable
wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air
bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and
the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.
• Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of
wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to
the aircraft’s operation. Check with appropriate authorities before
using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.
• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or
denial of network services to the offender, or legal action, or both.
Health and Safety Information
213
Section 11: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC. (“SAMSUNG”) warrants
that SAMSUNG’s Tablets and accessories (“Products”) are free
from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and
service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by
the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
Tablet
1 Year
Batteries (Including Internal
Batteries)
1 Year
Case
90 Days
Other Tablet Accessories
1 Year
What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product.
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting
from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper
storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or
unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches,
214
dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG; (c) defects or
damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when
pressing on a touch screen; (d) equipment that has the serial number or
the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or
made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear; (f) defects or damage
resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with
accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or
approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not
furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects or damage resulting
from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt,
windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (i) defects or
damage resulting from cellular signal reception or transmission, or
viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or
(j) Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited
Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of
rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not
cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger
not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any
of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or
(iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG
Tablet for which it is specified.
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is returned
in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty, SAMSUNG will
repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge.
SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or
new parts or components when repairing any Product, or may replace
the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/
replaced cases will be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All
other repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to
the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or
for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All replaced Products, parts,
components, boards and equipment shall become the property of
SAMSUNG. Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable
law, transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return
the Product to an authorized Tablet service facility in an adequate
container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or
comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase,
the serial number of the Product and the seller’s name and
address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product,
please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the
Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty
service, as some or all of the contents may be deleted or
reformatted during the course of warranty service.
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN
NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS
OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING
FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME
STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON
HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER
OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY
Warranty Information
215
TO YOU. SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR
REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS,
PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY
SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE
PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE
OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE
PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS,
PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY
SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND
THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect
to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer, representative or
reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or
to make binding representations or claims, whether in
advertising, presentations or otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG
regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty. This Limited
Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have
other rights that vary from state to state.
216
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND
NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be
combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other
person’s or entity’s Product or claim, and specifically, without
limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances
proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be
conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not
exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable
law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the
American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration
Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision
is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the
State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application
of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty. For any
arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of
attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less
(“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part
of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees,
expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim
was brought by the Purchaser in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,
you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total
administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such
fees, whichever is less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of
such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for
arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive of
attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large
Claim”) shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large
Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert
witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on the
arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This
arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNG’s
employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises
from the Product’s sale, condition or performance.
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing
notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of
the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the Product. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with
the subject line: “Arbitration Opt Out.” You must include in the opt
out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the
Product was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model
number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if
you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the Product box; (ii) on the Product information screen, which can
be found under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the
Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on
the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later
than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out
of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of
the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of the Limited Warranty.
Warranty Information
217
Severability.
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not
affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty.
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
©2011 Samsung Electronics America, Inc. All rights reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written
approval.
Specifications and availability subject to change without notice.
[060111]
End User License Agreement for Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement
(“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual
or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software
owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated
companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that
accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and
may include associated media, printed materials, “online” or
electronic documentation (“Software”). BY CLICKING THE “I
ACCEPT” BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE
218
THE “I ACCEPT”, AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD,
ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE
“DECLINE” BUTTON, AND DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this
EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of
the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage
media of one computer and use the Software on a single
computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make
the Software available over a network where it could be used by
multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of
the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes
only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or
other proprietary notices contained on the original.
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves
all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software
is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and
treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is
licensed, not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense
or provide commercial hosting services with the Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as
part of the product support services related to the Software
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide
customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose
this information in a form that personally identifies you.
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and
add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may
provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms
along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an
upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by
Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may
no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your
upgrade eligibility.
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the
rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it
is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the
Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include
all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and
printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not
retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an
indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the
end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA
terms.
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is
subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that
apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration
Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you
must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or
partial, of the Software.
9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party applications
may be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device.
SAMSUNG makes no representations whatsoever about any of
these applications. Since SAMSUNG has no control over such
Warranty Information
219
applications, Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that
SAMSUNG is not responsible for the availability of such
applications and is not responsible or liable for any content,
advertising, products, services, or other materials on or available
from such applications. Purchaser expressly acknowledges and
agrees that use of third-party applications is at Purchaser’s sole
risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to
Purchaser to take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser
selects to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan
horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on
this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to
Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,
sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the thirdparty or its products and services. Purchaser agrees that
SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly,
for any damage or loss caused or alleged to caused by, or in
connection with, use of or reliance on any such third-party
content, products, or services available on or through any such
application. Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that your use of
any third-party application is governed by such third-party
application provider’s Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy
Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or
personal data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to
220
such third-party application provider, will be subject to such
third-party application provider’s privacy policy, if such a policy
exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF
ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party Applications.
SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY
REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,
TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF,
OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING,
THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER
SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE
PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR
OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION
IS DONE AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND
PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO
YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM
THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER PURCHASER’S PERSONAL
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER. ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH
THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ON AN “AS
AVAILABLE” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST
EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES,
QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT
WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF
THE THRID-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS
CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET
PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR
ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES THE
ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY PURCHASER FROM
SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF
WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO
CREATE ANY WARRANTY.
11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO
ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO
CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG’S TOTAL
LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES
OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF
PURCHASER’S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS
MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA,
SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION THAT
WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING
Warranty Information
221
LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING
SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed
only with “restricted rights” and as “commercial items”
consisting of “commercial software” and “commercial software
documentation” with only those rights as are granted to all other
end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly
excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably
settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in
accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial
Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and
binding upon the parties.
222
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written
communications, proposals and representations with respect to
the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If
any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,
unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full
force and effect.
Index
Numerics
2G Network
Using 172
3G Network 173
Using 173
4G Network 124 172
Using 172
,
A
Accesibility
Activation 41 195
Accessibility settings 195
Accounts
setting up 53
Android Keyboard
Settings 194
Android Market 144
App Shortcuts 38
Application Bar 17
Applications 28
Alarm 28
Asphalt6 28
Blio 29
Books 29
,
Browser 29
Calculator 29
Calendar 29
Camera 29
Contacts 29
downloading new 144
Downloads 29
Dropbox 30
eBook 30
Email 30
Files 30
Gallery 30
Get Web Now 30
Gmail 30
Google Search 30
Latitude 30
Maps 31
Market 31
Media Hub 31
Memo 31
Messaging 31
MobileLife Organizer 31
Music 31
Music Player 31
My Account 32
My Device 32
Navigation 32
Pen memo 32
Photo editor 32
Places 32
Pro Apps 32
Pulse 32
Qello 32
Quickoffice HD 33
Security 33
Settings 33
Shutting Down 11
SimCity Deluxe HD 33
Slacker Radio 33
Social Hub 33
Talk 33
TegraZone 33
T-Mobile TV 33
Video Chat 34
Video player 34
Videos 34
223
Voice Search 34
World Clock 34
YouTube 34 165
Zinio 34
Applications settings
allow mock locations 185
development 184
managing 183
running services 183
stay awake 184
USB debugging 184
Auto-sync
Enabling 186
,
B
Back button 18
Battery
charging 7
Extending Battery 178
indicator 7
installing and removing 7
Blio 130
Bluetooth
Activation 169
Change Name 116
Deleting a Paired Device 118
224
Disconnecting a Paired Device 118
Enable 116 117
Find Nearby Devices 117
List Received Files 117
pairing with a device 117
Set Visibility 117
Settings 116
settings 169
turning on or off 116
Visible Time-Out 117
Bookmark
Removing Video Bookmark 91
Books
Sync 188
Browser 110
Clearing All Cookies 114
Copying and Pasting Hyperlinks 112
Copying Fields or Text 112
Emptying cookies 115
Menu 113
Plug-ins 115
Settings 114
Browser Downloads 135
Bubble
Options 68
,
C
Calculator 132
Calendar 132
Creating New Event 133
Customizing 133
Deleting 133
Managing 133
Sending 133
Settings 134
Camcorder
recording video 88
settings 88
Using 87
Camera
settings 84
taking photos 83
Using 83
Children and Cell Phones 202
Cokies
Clear All 114
Command Buttons
Overview 17
Using 18
Compatibility Zoom 20
Contact
Joining 58
Contacts
Copying 60
Copying to SIM Card 60 190
Copying to USB Storage 60
Creating 54
creating 54
Deleting 56
exporting and importing 60
Groups 61
Joining 58
Linking 58
Menu Options 56
namecards 59
starred contacts 63
Unjoining 58
Updating 55
updating 55
Cookies
Emptying 115
Copying Contact 60
Corporate Email
Account Syncronization 188
Add Account 188
,
Customizing
Screens 18
D
Data Roaming 171
Activate/Deactivate 171
Date & time settings 196
Deleting
Message Thread 69
Multiple messages 69
Single message 69
Display 176
Font Style 176
Mode 176
Display Mode
Changing Video Display Size 91
Display settings
animation 177
DivX
Locating VOD Number 92
Overview 91
Registering Your DivX Device 92
Registration Code 197
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
199
Downloads 134
Browser Downloads 135
managing 125
Other Downloads 135
Dropbox 135
Desktop Application Download 135
Image Sharing 86
Sharing Video 90
E
EDGE Network 172
Email
Account Settings 78
Adding Additional Accounts 77
Combined view 78
Composing and Sending 77
Creating an Internet Account 74
Internet Email 74
Outlook Email 75
Exchange
Settings 79
Exchange ActiveSync
Settings 79
Exchange Email 75
Export To USB Storage 60
225
F
Facebook
Video Chat 161
Factory Data Reset
Prior To 190
Favorites
Accessing 63
Adding 63
Removing 63
Files 137
Font Size
Caption 166
G
Gallery 94
sharing photos and video 96
Viewing Images and Pictures 95
Get 30
Gmail
About 73
account settings 72
composing and sending 72
refreshing your account 71
setting up your account 71
226
Google
Account Management Settings 188
Account Syncronization 187
Add Account 187
Adding a Sync Account 187
Android Market 144
Gmail 71
Latitude 140
Maps 142
Navigation 151
Places 154
Search 140
Voice Search 162
your account 10
YouTube 165
Google Search
Configuring Settings 20
Use Location 179
GPS Applications 127
Groups
Creating 61
Deleting 62
Renaming 61
GSM 172
H
Handwriting 46
Settings 49
Health and Safety Information 199
Home button 18
Home screen 16
primary shortcuts 26
wallpaper 39
Homepage
Setting 114
HSPA+ 124
Hyperlink
Copying and Pasting 112
I
Icons
Status Bar 23
Images
Assigning as a Contact icon 87
Assigning as wallpaper 87
Import From USB Storage 60
Importing and Exporting
Contacts 60
Internet Email 73
J
Joining
Contact information 58
K
Kies 40
Via Wi-Fi 168
L
Language and keyboard settings
select input method 192
select locale 191
Location and security settings
credential storage 182
device administration 181
Location Services 179
my location 179
screen unlock 179
visible passwords 181
Lock Screen
Set Image 86
Locking and Unlocking
screen lock sounds 175
unlocking the keypad 12
M
Managing Applications
Uninstalling Third-party Applications
185
Maps 142
Market 144
Marking Contact
Primary 59
Media Hub 98
Notices 99
Menu
context-sensitive 20
Message
Options 66
Read 67
Reply 67
Thread Options 68
Threads 67
Message Search 69
Message threads 67
Messages
Gmail 71
types 65
Messaging 147
Creating 65
Deleting a message 69
Font Size 66
Import Text 66
Insert Slide 66
Options 66
Sending 65
Settings 70
Viewing new 67
Microsoft Exchange 73
Mini App Tray 17
Overview 19
Mobile Networks 171
Data Roaming 171
Mobile NetworksUse Packet Data 171
MobileLife Family Organizer 147
Create an Appointment 148
Logging In 148
Mode 176
Music
Adding Songs to Playlists 104
Changing Library View 101
Changing Settings 102
Creating a Playlist 104
Deleting a Playlist 104
Music Application 100
227
Now Playing Screen 103
Options While Playing 103
Playing 102
Playing a Playlist 104
Searching for Music 101
Music Player
Adding Songs to Playlists 107
Changing Settings 109
Changing the Order of a Playlist 108
Creating a Playlist 107
Deleting a Playlist 108
Managing Your Music 107
Options During Playback 106
Playing a Playlist 108
Playing a Song 105
Re-Launching as Background App
109
Removing Songs from Playlists 108
Renaming a Playlist 107
Searching 107
Viewing Library 105
N
Namecards
sending 59
228
,
Navigation 18 19
command keys 26
Primary Shortcuts 26
screen 21
Network Mode
2G Network 172
3G Network 173
Notification Panel 21
Notifications 21
O
Other Downloads 135
Outlook 73
Synchronizing 188
P
Pairing with Bluetooth 117
PDF
Reading 136
Pen Memo
Delete 153
People
Video Chat 161
Photo IDs
Managing 56
Photos
Gallery 94
sharing 96
taking 83
Picture
Assign as Contact Icon 87
Assign as Wallpaper 87
Set as 86
Sharing 86
Power Saving Mode 178
Activate 178
Additional Parameters 178
Setting Launch Levels 178
Powering On and Off 9
Predictive Text
Using XT9 50
Privacy settings
backup and restore 189
factory data reset 191
Q
Qello 156
R
Reboot Device 12
Recent Apps
see Navigation 17
Reset
factory data 191
Ringtones
Notification 175
S
Samsung Keypad
ABC Mode 48
Changing the Input Type 47
Configuring 47
Entering Symbols 49
Settings 194
Symbol/Numeric Mode 48
Samsung keypad
entering text 46
SAR Values 204
Screen
Adding Shortcuts 38
Screen Capture 19
Viewing 19
Screen settings
auto adjust screen power 177
auto-rotate screen 177
brightness 176
timeout 177
Securing your device
locking and unlocking 12
screen unlock settings 179
Security
Application 158
locking and unlocking 12
locking your device 12
screen unlock pattern 179
Security settings
set screen lock 179
Send Namecard Via 57
Sending Messages 65
Settings 167
Messaging 70
Shortcuts 38
Silent mode 174
SIM Card 6
Changing Exisitng PIN 181
Installing 6
Lock 181
Removing 6
SIM Card Lock
Setting Up 181
SimCity 158
Software Update 197
Wi-Fi Only 198
Sound
Haptic Feedback 175
Notification Ringtone 175
Settings 175
Vibration Intensity 175
Sound settings
audible selection tones 175
screen lock sounds 175
silent mode 174
Standard Limited Warranty 214
SWYPE
Example 45
Swype
Advanced Settings 193
Configuring 43
Editing Keyboard 44
Entering Letters 44
Entering Symbols and Numbers 45
Entering Text 43 45
Help 43 193
Settings 193
Speech Recognition 44
Tutorial 193
Sync Books 188
,
,
229
Synchronization settings
Auto-sync 186
background data 185
System Updates 197
,
tmomail.net 65 71
Turning Your Device On and Off 9
Twitter
Video Chat 161
T
Tablet Options 15
TalkBack
Activation 41
TegraZone
Games 160
Tethering 123
Activating 123
Active Icon 123
Disconnecting 123
Text
changing input method 42
Copying, Deleting, or Replacing 51
entering 41
input methods 41
Pasting 52
Using Swype 43
virtual QWERTY keyboard 41
Text-to-Speech
Settings 71
Third-Party Applications 185
230
U
Unlocking your device
set an unlock pattern 179
Use GPS Satellites 179
Use Packet Data 171
Using the Camcorder 87
V
Vibration
Intensity 175
Video
Changing Screen Display Mode 91
Sharing via 90
Video Chat 80 161
Recording Video 161
Settings 161
Videos
Gallery 94
recording 88
sharing 96
Voice Search 162
,
Volume
key 15
Volume Settings
Adjusting 174
W
Wallpaper 97
Setting Image 86
Warranty Information 214
WCDMA 172
Web applications
enable downloading 118
Widgets 34
Adding 35
My Account 32
Wi-Fi
About 119
Activating 167
Activating/Deactivitaing 119
adding a connection manually 121
Direct Connection 168
Kies via 121
Network Notification 120
Notify Me 120
Scanning and Connecting 120
Settings 168
settings 168
Sleep Policy 120
Status icons 120
WiFi (see Wi-Fi) 119
Wi-Fi Hotspot 124
Activating 124
Connecting 124
Securing 125
Wireless Networking
Bluetooth 115
Wi-Fi 119
World Clock 162
WPA2 PSK 125
X
XT9 Predictive Text 49
Y
YouTube 165
Settings 166
Video Chat 161
Z
Zinio 166
231
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising